JP2017131749A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance interest.SOLUTION: A game machine controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player by performing variable display includes a variable winning device capable of changing to a first state in which a game medium cannot enter easily or does not enter and a second state in which a game medium can enter more easily than the first state, predetermined performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance for reporting whether the variable winning device can be changed to the second state or a possibility of resulting in an advantageous state, and predetermined performance limiting means for limiting execution of a predetermined performance during a predetermined period when the variable display is not being performed. The predetermined performance execution means does not execute a new predetermined performance during execution of a predetermined performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 70

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and multiple types of identification information are variably displayed when the game medium wins in a start prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area. There are pachinko machines where a predetermined number of bets are set and a slot machine in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) are variably displayed when a start operation is performed. In a gaming machine configured to be able to execute variable display of identification information in this way, when the display result of variable display of identification information becomes a predetermined display result in the variable display unit, a predetermined game value (for example, jackpot) Some are configured to give the player a transition to a state, etc.).

  An example of this type of gaming machine is described in Patent Document 1.

JP 2009-195432 A

  An object of this invention is to provide the game machine which can improve interest.

(Means A) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and a first state in which a game medium is difficult to enter or does not enter, and the first state A variable winning device that can be changed to a second state in which a game medium is more likely to enter than a state, and a predetermined effect for notifying whether the variable winning device is in the second state or an advantageous state is executed. A predetermined effect executing means; and a predetermined effect restricting means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect during a predetermined period when variable display is not performed. The predetermined effect executing means is configured to execute a new predetermined effect during execution of the predetermined effect. Is not executed. With such a configuration, interest can be improved.

(Means 1) Another gaming machine according to the present invention has an advantageous state (for example, a bonus) advantageous to the player based on the fact that a specific condition has been established in the game (for example, winning internally and winning a bonus) (For example, slot machine 1. It may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 700 shown in the embodiment 4), which is different from the advantageous state (for example, gold, silver, copper) Bonus granting means (for example, the part that executes steps S2609 to S2611 in the sub CPU 91a) and game-related information (for example, total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, earned coins, etc.) Game-related information storage means (for example, an acquired coin area allocated to the RAM 91b) and game-related information can be specified. Game-related information output means for outputting information (for example, the game history itself or information such as a two-dimensional code including the game history) (for example, a part for executing step S2707 in the sub CPU 91a), and a player And setting means (for example, a part for executing step S2308 in the sub CPU 91a) for setting information for specifying the game related information stored in the game related information storage means based on the operation of The granting unit is configured to grant a privilege when the setting unit is configured to output information that can identify game-related information and to output information that can identify game-related information. When there is not, a privilege is not given (for example, the sub CPU 91a performs steps S2608A to S2608C, S26. As shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b), the game is started when the password is entered and the game is started by selecting "Easy start". In addition, for example, whether the sub CPU 91a may shift to the processing of steps S2608A to S2608C and S2609 only when Y is determined in step S2601, so that the password is input. Or coins may be awarded only when “Easy Start” is selected and the mode is changed to the specific performance mode, and when no password is entered and “Easy Start” is not selected, coins are awarded There is no advantage indication result (for example, “○” or “×”) indicating whether or not the production result is controlled to an advantageous state. Result) or a privilege grant suggestion result (for example, a “coin” effect result) that suggests that a privilege is granted is common to the case where the advantage suggestion result is reported and the case where the privilege grant suggestion is reported. The suggestion effect execution means for executing the suggestion effect to be notified after the execution of the common effect is performed (for example, the sub CPU 91a performs the predetermined effect in step S4010, thereby performing the predetermined effect as shown in FIGS. 35, 37, and 38). The suggestion effect execution means further includes an advantage suggestion result that suggests that the suggestion effect is controlled to an advantageous state as an advantage possibility suggestion result, or a non-advantage that suggests that the suggestion effect is not controlled to the advantageous state. The suggestion result can be notified, and the non-advantageous suggestion result can be switched to the benefit grant suggestion result and can be notified. Characterized in that the benefits can be granted. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest related to the provision of a privilege for a player who is making settings for outputting game-related information.
Note that “given a privilege advantageously” may mean that a privilege is given at a higher rate when the setting for outputting information that can specify game-related information is performed. , It is possible to grant a privilege only when the setting for outputting information that can specify game-related information is made, and when the setting for outputting information that can specify game-related information is not made You may not give at all.

(Means 2) The gaming system according to the present invention controls the advantageous game (for example, bonus) advantageous to the player based on the fact that the specific condition is established in the game (for example, internal winning and winning a bonus). Gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1. It may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 700 shown in Embodiment 4) and game related information (for example, total number of games, number of BBs, RB The information (for example, the game history itself or information such as a two-dimensional code including the game history) that can specify the number of times and the game history such as acquired coins) is received, and predetermined processing is performed based on the information. A gaming system (for example, a gaming system 1001) including a management device (for example, a management server 1200) that executes the game machine, A privilege granting means for granting a privilege different from the state (for example, gold, silver, bronze coins) (for example, a part for executing steps S2609 to S2611 in the sub CPU 91a) and a game-related information for storing game-related information in an identifiable manner Information storage means (for example, an acquired coin area allocated to the RAM 91b), game related information output means for outputting information that can specify game related information (for example, a part for executing step S2707 in the sub CPU 91a), a player And setting means (for example, a part for executing step S2308 in the sub CPU 91a) for setting information for specifying the game related information stored in the game related information storage means based on the operation of The granting unit outputs information that can specify the game-related information by the setting unit. When the setting is performed, a privilege is advantageously given as compared with the case where the setting for outputting information that can specify the game-related information is not performed (for example, the sub CPU 91a performs steps S2608A to S2608C, By executing S2609, as shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b), when the game is started with the password input, it is compared with the case where the game is started by selecting “Easy Start”. In addition, for example, whether the sub CPU 91a may shift to the processing of steps S2608A to S2608C and S2609 only when Y is determined in step S2601, so that the password is input. Or coins may be awarded only when “Easy Start” is selected and the mode is changed to the specific performance mode. If no password is entered and “Easy Start” is not selected, no coin is awarded. ), An advantage possibility suggestion result (for example, “○” or “×” production result) or a privilege grant suggestion that a privilege has been granted, which suggests whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous gaming state as a performance result The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the sub CPU 91a executes the predetermined effect in step S4010) that performs the suggestion effect to notify the result (for example, the effect result of “coin”) after executing the effect of the common mode. 35, 37, and 38, a predetermined effect is executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest related to the provision of a privilege for a player who is making settings for outputting game-related information.
Note that “given a privilege advantageously” may mean that a privilege is given at a higher rate when the setting for outputting information that can specify game-related information is performed. , It is possible to grant a privilege only when the setting for outputting information that can specify game-related information is made, and when the setting for outputting information that can specify game-related information is not made You may not give at all.

(Means 3) In the gaming system of means 2, the privilege granting unit gives a predetermined exchange value (for example, gold, silver, or copper coin) as a privilege (for example, the sub CPU 91a executes step S2609, (Grant coins of gold, silver and bronze), and the management device consumes a predetermined exchange value, thereby giving a predetermined advantageous value (for example, item A, item B). 47 may be configured to include the item A or the item B by executing the item granting process of FIG. 47 in the management server 1200. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest relating to the provision of a predetermined exchange value as a privilege for a player who has made settings for outputting game-related information.

(Means 4) In the gaming machine or game system of any one of the means 1 to 3, the suggestion effect execution means is advantageous in suggesting that the suggestion effect is controlled to the advantageous game state as an advantageous possibility suggestion result. It is possible to notify a game suggestion result (for example, an effect result of “O”) or a non-advantageous game suggestion result (for example, an effect result of “X”) that suggests that the game is not controlled to be in an advantageous game state (for example, the sub CPU 91a By executing the predetermined effect in step S4010, “○” or “×” can be notified as the effect result), and setting for outputting information that can specify the game-related information is performed by the setting means. In the suggestion effect, after starting the execution of the option display effect that displays a plurality of option displays corresponding to each effect result, It is possible to switch from the incentive result to the privilege grant suggestion result (for example, the sub CPU 91a executes a predetermined effect process according to the flow shown in FIG. 33 to temporarily display “x” as shown in FIG. 35 (3). It may be configured such that an effect of switching from the “x” effect result to the “coin” effect result can be executed as shown in FIG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest related to the provision of a privilege for a player who is making a setting for outputting game-related information by making the notification mode of the suggestion effect surprising. Can do.

(Means 5) In the gaming machine or game system according to any one of the means 1 to 3, the suggestion effect execution means is advantageous in suggesting that the suggestion effect is controlled to the advantageous game state as an advantageous possibility suggestion result. It is possible to notify a game suggestion result (for example, an effect result of “◯”) or a non-advantageous game suggestion result (for example, an effect result of “x”) that suggests that the game is not controlled to be in an advantageous game state (for example, a sub CPU 91a). Is capable of notifying “○” or “×” as the effect result by executing the predetermined effect in step S4010), and in the suggestion effect, a plurality of option display effects corresponding to each effect result are displayed. Can be notified of any effect result (for example, the sub CPU 91a can execute the predetermined effect in step S4010). As shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. 38, the roulette picture including a plurality of options such as “○”, “×”, “coin” is displayed and a predetermined effect is started. When the setting means is configured to output information that can specify game-related information, the setting means outputs information that can specify game-related information. The option display corresponding to the non-advantageous game suggestion result displayed when the setting is not performed is replaced with the option display corresponding to the benefit grant suggestion result, and the execution of the option display effect is started. The result can be notified (for example, the sub-CPU 91a executes a predetermined effect process according to the flow shown in FIG. 36, thereby providing a password as shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. When a game is started by entering a game, the roulette rotates in a manner that includes more “coin” options than when “easy start” is selected and the game starts. Such an effect may be started and an effect result of “coin” is notified). According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest related to the provision of a privilege for a player who is making a setting for outputting game-related information by making the notification mode of the suggestion effect surprising. Can do.

(Means 6) Another aspect of the gaming system according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1) that allows a player to play a predetermined game and outputs information for identifying a gaming history, A gaming system (for example, gaming system 1001) including a management device (for example, management device 1200) that acquires and manages information output from a machine, and has a plurality of types of predetermined advantageous values (for example, item A) Alternatively, a right granting unit for granting a right (for example, coin) to be given to any one of the items B) according to the game history (for example, a part for performing the process of S2604 to S2607 in FIG. 28 and performing the process of S2611). And an advantageous value determining means for determining a predetermined advantageous value to be granted based on the right granted by the right granting means (for example, S3703 and S37 in FIG. 47). 3), and the advantageous value determining means, when the specific effect set by the player is set as the effect executed on the gaming machine, As compared with the case where is not set, it is determined that the predetermined advantageous value of the type related to the specific effect is given at a higher rate as the predetermined advantageous value (for example, the determination process of S3704 in FIG. 47 is performed, (S3708 is a part for performing the process of S3709). With such a configuration, a predetermined advantageous value of a type related to the set specific effect is easily given, so that a predetermined advantageous value preferred by the player can be given, and a predetermined advantageous value is given to the player. Can make you feel joy. Moreover, since the willingness to play a game by setting a specific effect can be increased, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Means 7) Still another aspect of the gaming system according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a slot machine 1) that allows a player to play a predetermined game and outputs information for identifying a gaming history; A gaming system (for example, gaming system 1001) including a management device (for example, management device 1200) that acquires and manages information output from a gaming machine, and a plurality of types of predetermined advantageous values (for example, items) A right granting means for granting the right to grant one of A or item B) according to the game history (for example, the part that performs the process of S2604 to S2607 in FIG. 28 and performs the process of S2611), and the right grant Advantageous value determining means for determining a predetermined advantageous value to be granted based on the right granted by the means (for example, the determination process of S3703 and S3713 in FIG. 47). And a part for performing the process of S3710), and an advantageous value type selection means for the player to arbitrarily select a desired kind of the advantageous value (for example, a part for performing the processes of S3706 and S3715 in FIG. 47) The advantage value determining means includes a type selected by the player by the advantage value type selection means when the game frequency is higher than the predetermined frequency, compared to when the game frequency is not higher than the predetermined frequency. It is characterized in that it is determined to give a predetermined advantageous value at a high rate (for example, a part in which the determination process in S3705 in FIG. 47 is performed, the process in S3708 is performed, and the process in S3709 is performed). With such a configuration, a predetermined advantageous value that the player likes is given according to the frequency of the game, so that the player's willingness to play the game can be increased and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Means 8) In the means 6, as a right to give a predetermined advantageous value, a first right (for example, silver coin or copper coin) and a right of a kind related to a specific effect set by the player are granted. A second right (for example, gold coin) having a high ratio may be set, and notification means (for example, a part for performing the processing of S2613 in FIG. 29) for notifying that the second right has been obtained may be provided. According to such a configuration, the player can identify that the predetermined advantageous value that he / she likes is given, so that the player's willingness to play the game again can be increased and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. it can.

(Means 9) As the right to give a predetermined advantageous value in the means 7, the first right (for example, silver coin or copper coin) and the right of the kind set by the player to be given are granted. The second right (for example, gold coin) having a high ratio is set, and notification means (for example, the part performing the processing of S2613 in FIG. 29) for notifying that the second right has been obtained may be provided. Good. According to such a configuration, the player can identify that the predetermined advantageous value that he / she likes is given, so that the player's willingness to play the game again can be increased and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. it can.

(Means 10) Any one of the means 6 to the means 9 includes condition changing means (for example, a part for performing the processing of S3707 in FIG. 47) for changing a condition for giving a predetermined advantageous value according to the game history. You may do it. According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 11) Still another aspect of the gaming system according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a slot machine 1 or a pachinko gaming machine 700) that outputs predetermined information (for example, a two-dimensional code) according to a game result, A gaming system (for example, a gaming system 1001) including a management device (for example, a management server 1200) that updates a gaming history based on predetermined information, wherein the gaming machine has first information ( For example, the first update means (for example, steps S2602 to S2603 in FIG. 28) for updating the experience value, the number of games, the number of BBs, and the achievement mission) and the second information (for example, gold, silver, Second updating means (for example, steps S2608 to S2611 in FIG. 28) for updating the number of copper coins), the first information updated by the first updating means, and 2 includes predetermined information output means (for example, steps S2808, S2809, S2812, and S2813 in FIG. 31) for outputting the second information updated by the update means included in the predetermined information. First counting means (for example, steps S3104 and S3105 in FIG. 41, for example) that counts the first information included in the predetermined information output by the first history information (for example, experience value, number of games, number of BBs, achievement mission) 42 and steps S3205 and S3206 in FIG. 42 and second information included in the predetermined information output by the predetermined information output means as second history information (for example, the number of accumulated coins) (for example, FIG. 41). Steps S3104 and S3105), and the first history information tabulated by the first tabulating unit is used as the player's game history ( For example, game history output means (for example, step S3109 in FIG. 41, step S3208 in FIG. 42) for outputting as experience value, total number of games, cumulative BB count, achievement mission) and the second summed by the second counting means. Advantageous value providing means (for example, steps S3709 to S3716 in FIG. 47) for providing a player with a predetermined advantageous value (for example, item) according to the history information is included. With such a configuration, not only the first history information but also the second history information is aggregated according to the progress of the game, and not only the first history information is output as the game history but also the first history information, (2) Since a predetermined advantageous value is given to the player according to the history information, it is possible to improve the interest for the light user.

(Means 12) Still another aspect of the gaming system according to the present invention is the first game-related information (for example, the total number of games or the number of BBs) that is capable of performing a predetermined game and is related to the result of the game. , The number of RBs) (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700), and a management device including first game related information receiving means for receiving first game related information output from the gaming machine ( For example, a gaming system including a management server 1200), wherein the management device consumes a predetermined exchange value (for example, gold, silver, bronze coins) to give a privilege to a predetermined advantageous value (for example, an item) ) Based on the first game related information received by the first game related information received by the first game related information receiving means (for example, steps S3709 to S3716 in FIG. 47). First exchange value giving means for giving a exchange value (for example, gold, silver, or copper coin) (for example, as shown in Modification 2 in FIG. 78), and the management server 1200 performs steps S2609 to S2611 in FIG. A part that executes the same process) and game content distribution means (for example, a game application; see FIG. 50I) capable of playing a predetermined game is distributed to the player. For example, step S3601 in FIG. 46 and second game-related information receiving means (for example, the second game-related information (for example, points from the game application) related to the game result in the game content are received from the player. 46, steps S3602 and S3603 in FIG. 46, and the second game relation received by the second game related information receiving means. A second exchange value giving means (for example, step S3604 in FIG. 46) for giving a second exchange value (eg, gold, silver, or copper coin) based on the information. A predetermined advantageous value is given both when the exchange value of 1 is consumed and when the second exchange value is consumed (for example, in steps S3709 to S3716 in FIG. 47, a coin as the first exchange value is given). Or a coin as the second exchange value, the item giving process is executed). With such a configuration, the game content distributed by the management device as well as consuming the first exchange value given when the first game related information related to the game result on the gaming machine is received. Since it is possible to receive a predetermined advantageous value by consuming the second exchange value given when the second game related information related to the game result is received, the conventional gaming system and By increasing the chances of receiving a given advantage value in comparison, the advantage value addition function can be fully utilized.

It is a figure which shows the whole structure of the game system which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a portable terminal. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the management server to which the management apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention is applied. It is a front view of the slot machine to which the gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention is applied. It is a figure showing the internal structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement position of a photoelectric sensor. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the structure of the combination defined as winning. It is a figure which shows the object combination of the internal lottery classified by game state. It is a figure which shows the experience value provision number according to level and the number of games. It is explanatory drawing which shows the coin acquisition specification between games, and the stock specification of a stock coin. It is a figure which shows the transition of a main menu screen. It is a figure which shows the hint screen of a stock coin. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating password input operation. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating password input operation. (A) is a figure which shows a password analysis table, (b) is a figure which shows the analysis procedure of a password. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display condition at the time of the normal production mode of a specific production area, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display situation at the time of specific production mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the output of a two-dimensional code. It is a figure which shows the information contained in a two-dimensional code. It is a figure which shows the screen at the time of stock coin acquisition lottery production. It is a figure which shows the structure of the player database with which a management server is provided, the game history database, and a privilege database. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process (sub) which sub CPU performs. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main menu display process performed with a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main menu operation process before password input performed with a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the password input reception process performed with a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation screen at the time of the password of a different model being input. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the level coin related process performed with a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the procedure of the level coin related process in the case of alert | reporting acquisition of gold coins. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main menu operation process after password input performed with a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the two-dimensional code display process performed with a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special effect execution process performed with a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows a predetermined production process. It is description which shows the specific example of a predetermined production | presentation determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a predetermined production. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a predetermined | prescribed effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production | presentation aspect of a predetermined production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production | presentation aspect of a predetermined production. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the server main process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the member registration process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the easy start update process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the normal update process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the level and experience value update process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the menu selection reception process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the password issuing process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game provision process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the item provision process performed with a management server. It is a figure which shows the lottery table used by item acquisition lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the item provision process performed with the management server of the slot machine to which the game machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention is applied. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen displayed on the display part of a portable terminal. It is a figure which shows the exchange of the data between a portable terminal and a management server regarding member registration. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating data exchange between the slot machine and the portable terminal, and between the portable terminal and the management server regarding easy start update. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating data exchange between the slot machine and the mobile terminal and between the mobile terminal and the management server regarding normal update. It is a figure which shows the exchange of the data between a portable terminal and a management server regarding privilege provision. It is a figure which shows the information contained in the two-dimensional code output from the slot machine to which the game machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention is applied. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine to which the gaming machine according to Embodiment 4 of the present invention is applied. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure in the main board | substrate with which a pachinko game machine is provided. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the coin acquisition specification between the games in Embodiment 4, and the stock specification of a stock coin. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution area of a predetermined effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed with a roulette aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed with a roulette aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed with a roulette aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case the predetermined | prescribed effect which alert | reports the notification result of losing is performed in a roulette aspect before notifying that a specific effect (reach effect) is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed with a dice aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed with a dice aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed with a dice aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case the predetermined | prescribed effect which alert | reports the alerting | reporting result of a loss is performed in a dice aspect before alert | reporting that a specific effect (reach effect) is performed. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect aspect determination table and a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect color determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd predetermined production process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd predetermined | prescribed effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd predetermined | prescribed effect aspect determination table and a 2nd predetermined | prescribed effect color determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the combination pattern of a structure in the system for games. (A) is a figure which shows the winning probability of the coin to discharge | release, (b) is a figure which shows the winning probability of a stock coin. It is a figure which shows the recovery conditions of a point, and the number of recovery points.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment 1]
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an overall configuration of a gaming system 1001 according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming system 1001 includes a slot machine 1 to which the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is applied, a management server 1200 to which the management device according to the first embodiment of the present invention is applied, Consists of

  The slot machine 1 is installed in a game hall (hall), and the management server 1200 is connected to the Internet network 900. Data exchange between the slot machine 1 and the management server 1200 is performed via a portable terminal 1100 having a two-dimensional code reading function and a function for connecting to the Internet network 900.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the portable terminal 1100 of this embodiment. The portable terminal 1100 includes a control unit 110, a storage unit 120, an operation unit 130, a display unit 140, a wireless communication unit 150, an antenna 151, and a camera unit 160.

  The storage unit 120 includes a semiconductor memory such as a ROM (Read Only Memory), a nonvolatile memory such as a flash memory, and a volatile memory such as a RAM (Random Access Memory). The storage unit 120 stores programs and data such as application programs for causing the control unit 110 to execute various functions of the mobile terminal 1100.

  The operation unit 130 includes dial keys, cross operation keys, and other function keys for inputting numbers such as telephone numbers and various data, alphabets, and other characters. Alternatively, the operation unit 130 may be configured to include a touch panel. The operation unit 130 receives an operation input from the user and sends a signal related to the received operation to the control unit 110.

  The display unit 140 includes a liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred to as “LCD”). The display unit 140 may be configured by a display device such as an EL (Electro Luminescence) display. The display unit 140 displays character data and image data supplied from the control unit 110.

  The wireless communication unit 150 transmits a signal received from another mobile terminal or server via the antenna 151 to the control unit 110 and causes the antenna 151 to output a signal to be transmitted from the control unit 110 to the other mobile terminal or server.

  The camera unit 160 captures an image of a shooting target in accordance with the player's operation, converts the captured image into image data, and supplies the image data to the control unit 110. In this embodiment, the camera unit 160 images a two-dimensional code.

The control unit 110 includes a microprocessor (Micro Processing Unit, hereinafter referred to as “MPU”). The control unit 110 performs processing on the data from the storage unit 120, the operation unit 130, the display unit 140, the wireless communication unit 150 unit, and the camera unit 160 according to a program such as an application program stored in the storage unit 120. The processed data is supplied to the storage unit 120, the display unit 140, and the wireless communication unit 150.

  In addition to the above configuration, the mobile terminal 1100 may have a voice input / output function and an infrared communication function included in a general mobile phone.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the management server 1200. The management server 1200 has a function as a general Web server. As shown in FIG. 3, the management server 1200 includes a control unit 210, a storage unit 220, an operation unit 230, a display unit 240, and a communication unit 250. Including.

  The storage unit 220 includes a ROM, a RAM, an external storage device such as a flash memory and a hard disk drive. The storage unit 220 stores programs and data for causing the control unit 210 to execute various functions of the management server 1200.

  The operation unit 230 includes an input device such as a keyboard, a mouse, a keypad, a touch pad, and a touch panel. The operation unit 230 receives an operation input from a user such as an administrator of the management server 1200 and sends a signal related to the received operation to the control unit 210.

The display unit 240 is configured by an LCD, for example. The display unit 240 may be configured by other display devices such as a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display or an EL display.
The display unit 240 displays character data and image data supplied from the control unit 210.

  The communication unit 250 supplies data received from the mobile terminal 1100 or another server via the Internet network 900 to the control unit 210, and the data supplied from the control unit 210 is supplied to the mobile terminal via the Internet network 900. It is transmitted to 1100 or another server.

  The control unit 210 is configured by an MPU, for example. The control unit 210 performs processing on the data from the storage unit 220, the operation unit 230, the display unit 240, the communication unit 250, and the like according to the program stored in the storage unit 220, and stores the processed data in the storage unit 220, The operation unit 230, the display unit 240, and the communication unit 250 are supplied.

  Next, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. First, the structure and electrical configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the slot machine 1 includes a housing 1 a having an open front surface and a front door 1 b pivotally supported on a side end of the housing 1 a. .

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 5, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter, left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R) having a plurality of symbols arranged on the outer periphery are arranged. Are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 4, among the symbols arranged on the left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R, three consecutive symbols are provided on the front door 1b. It arrange | positions so that it can see from the see-through window 3. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7, on the outer periphery of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R, “black 7”, “net 7 (shaded 7)”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “ A plurality of identifiable symbols such as “Replay”, “Watermelon”, “Cherry”, “Bell”, and “Orange” are drawn in a predetermined order for each reel 2. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R are displayed in the upper, middle and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIGS. 5 and 8) provided correspondingly. As a result, the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the see-through window 3 while continuously changing. Further, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, so that three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back are provided. ing. The reel LED 55 includes 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R, and is configured so that each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  At the position corresponding to each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the front door 1b, a horizontally-long rectangular see-through window 3 that allows the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to be seen through from the front side is provided. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

  For the front door 1b, a medal insertion portion 4 capable of inserting medals (game value), a medal payout port 9 from which medals are paid out, and a credit (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player) are used. The MAXBET switch operated when setting the maximum bet number (in this embodiment, three in any game state) out of the prescribed number of bets determined in accordance with the game state within the range 6. Settlement switch 10 operated when the medal used for setting the medal and the bet number stored as credits is settled (the medal used for setting the credit and bet number is returned), the game is started Start switch 7 that is operated when performing, and stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Effect switch 56 for (CHANCE buttons) are provided operable by the player.

  Further, the front door 1b displays a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning, an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, and the like. Game auxiliary indicator 12, 1BETLED14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2BETLED15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and that the bet number is set to 3 3BETLED 16 for notifying by lighting, insertion request LED 17 for notifying the state where a medal can be inserted by lighting, start effective LED 18 for notifying by lighting that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, weight (previous) Wait for the reel to start rotating because a certain period has not elapsed since the game started That state) in wait for notifying by lighting a a is that in LED 19, a game display section 13 in the replay LED20 is provided for informing is provided by lighting the effect that during replay game, which will be described later.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 7) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and stop switches 8L, 8C, The left, middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R (see FIG. 8) for notifying that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is effective are provided inside the 8R. It has been.

  Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. The set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time, and the validity / invalidity of the stop function for controlling the stop state at the end of the BB, which will be described later (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) A check switch 36a for selecting the automatic settlement function that controls automatic settlement at the end of BB, which will be described later (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation). An automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting invalidity, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are provided in a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 5) provided inside the housing 1a. ) Side or the medal payout exit 9 side, a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching, and a inserted medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector (not shown) and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 8) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  Inside the casing 1a, reel sensors 33L and 33C capable of detecting the reel reference positions of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, the right reel 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, respectively. , 33R (see FIG. 8), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and medals stored in the hopper tank 34a A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out the medals from the medal payout outlet 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the amount of stored medal stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  The front side of the power supply box 100 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in a normal state. There are provided a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery to be described later, and a power switch 39 that is operated when the power is turned ON / OFF. .

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 having such a configuration, the player first inserts a medal from the medal insertion unit 4 or sets a bet number using a credit. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a stipulated number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 4) become valid and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In this embodiment, as the specified number of bets, three are set regardless of the gaming state, and when the specified number of bets is set, the pay lines L1 to L5 become valid. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed. The winning line L2 set across the lines, the winning line L3 set across the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the upper stage of the left reel 2L, the middle stage of the middle reel 2C, the lower stage of the right reel 2R, That is, the winning line L4 set across the symbols arranged in the lower right direction, the lower stage of the left reel 2L, the middle stage of the middle reel 2C, the upper stage of the right reel 2R, ie, set up over the symbols arranged in the upper right direction. Five types of winning lines L5 are defined as winning lines.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, all the reels (right reel 2L, middle reel 2C and right reel 2R) are stopped, so that one game is finished, and a predetermined symbol combination on a valid pay line (valid pay line) (Hereinafter referred to as a combination) stops as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player, Added to credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 4). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of effective pay lines, the number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the effective pay line is totaled, A medal is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. The Rukoto. In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the effective winning line, the gaming state is shifted according to the combination of symbols. .

  As shown in FIG. 6, in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display 51, a light emitting element 57a and a light receiving element 57b constituting a photoelectric sensor 57 (see FIG. 8) are provided. When the irradiation light from the light emitting element 57a is reflected by a detection object (for example, the portable terminal 1100) in the area in front of the liquid crystal display 51, the light receiving element 57b receives the reflected light. Then, by detecting the amount of light received by the light receiving element 57b, it is detected whether or not the irradiation light of the light emitting element 57a is reflected by the portable terminal 1100. As will be described in detail later, when the mobile terminal 1100 is detected, the liquid crystal display 51 automatically displays a main menu screen for displaying a two-dimensional code including information such as a game history.

  In this embodiment, in front of the liquid crystal display 51 and at a position where the light receiving element 57b can receive reflected light from the mobile terminal 1100, and further, a position where the mobile terminal 1100 can acquire a two-dimensional code (that is, the liquid crystal display 51 The position close to the area where the two-dimensional code is displayed is set as the specific area. As a result, the main menu screen is output simply by performing the operation for acquiring the two-dimensional code at a position close to the area where the two-dimensional code is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, so when acquiring the two-dimensional code. The annoyance felt by the player can be eliminated.

  FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 8, the slot machine 1 includes a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The gaming control board 40 controls the gaming state, the presentation control board 90 controls the presentation according to the gaming state, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1. To be supplied.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC 100V power from outside. The power supply board 101 generates a DC voltage necessary for driving each electrical component constituting the slot machine 1 from the AC100V power supply, and is connected to the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 connected via the game control board 40. Supply.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  On the game control board 40, the above-described MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, insertion medal sensor 31, door open The detection switch 25 and reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Detection signals from these connected switches are input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the game display unit 13, 1-3 BETLEDs 14-16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, A BET switch valid LED 21, left, middle and right stop valid LEDs 22 L, 22 C, 22 R, a set value display 24, a flow path switching solenoid 30, reel motors 32 L, 32 C, 32 R are connected and via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b described above is connected, and these electric components are driven based on the control of a main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a main control unit 41, a random number generation circuit 42, a sampling circuit 43, a switch detection circuit 44, a motor drive circuit 45, a solenoid drive circuit 46, an LED drive circuit 47, and a power interruption detection. A circuit 48 and a reset circuit 49 are provided.

  The main control unit 41 includes a microcomputer including a main CPU 41a, a RAM 41b, a ROM 41c, and an I / O 41d, and controls a game. The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates a value each time a pulse is generated. The sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42 and outputs the acquired numerical value to the main control unit 41. The random number generation circuit 42 is set for each type of random number used for the progress of the game, and the range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number is determined. The sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number in accordance with an instruction from the main CPU 41a.

  The configuration for acquiring the random number is not limited to the configuration described above, and is arbitrary. For example, the main CPU 41a may process or update various numerical values by software processing using different random counters based on the numerical values acquired from the sampling circuit 43. In this embodiment, the range of the above random number value is a 16-bit range, that is, a value in the range of 0 to 65535.

  The switch detection circuit 44 detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 101. The motor drive circuit 45 performs drive control of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The solenoid drive circuit 46 performs drive control of the flow path switching solenoid 30. The LED drive circuit 47 performs drive control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a voltage drop is detected. The reset circuit 49 sends a reset signal to the main CPU 41a when power is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the main CPU 41a.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41c to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The RAM 41b is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The ROM 41c stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The I / O 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 41b is held while the backup power is being supplied.

  The main CPU 41a repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 is changed as a basic process, and step by step according to the change of the detection state of the various switches. Execute the process to move to. Further, the main CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and is capable of interrupting the basic process by executing the interrupt and executing the interrupt process, and the voltage output from the power interruption detection circuit 48. A power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed in response to the input of the decrease signal, and a timer interrupt process (main) is executed at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). Note that the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time required to complete the repetition of the process depending on the control state in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to an effect switch 56 (in this embodiment, it is expressed as “CHANCE button” on the outer surface thereof), and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is inputted. It has become.

  Further, the effect control board 90 is connected to effect devices such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 4), effect effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the above-described reel LED 55 arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. These effect devices are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Furthermore, a photoelectric sensor 57 is connected to the effect control board 90. When the light emitted from the light emitting element 57a is received by the light receiving element 57b, a detection signal is inputted. The sub-control unit 91 detects the color of the reflection object based on the amount of light received by the light receiving element 57b, that is, the amount of light reflected by the detection object. Thereby, it is detected whether the detection target is the portable terminal 1100 and whether it is a player.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 performs output control of effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55. However, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board separately from the sub control part 91, and the sub control part 91 is based on a command from the main control part 41. The output pattern of the effect device may be determined and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output The output control of the effect device is performed by both of the control units.

  Further, in this embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are exemplified as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, and is mechanically driven, for example. A display device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the rendering device.

  The effect control board 90 includes a sub-control unit 91, a display control circuit 92, an LED drive circuit 93, an audio output circuit 94, a reset circuit 95, a switch detection circuit 96, a clock device 97, and a power interruption detection circuit. 98.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 is configured by a microcomputer including a sub CPU 91a, a RAM 91b, a ROM 91c, and an I / O 91d, and controls production. The display control circuit 92 performs display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90. The LED drive circuit 93 performs drive control of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55. The audio output circuit 94 performs audio output control from the speakers 53 and 54. The reset circuit 95 sends a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time. The switch detection circuit 96 detects a detection signal input from the effect switch 56 connected to the effect control board 90. The clock device 97 outputs time information including date information and time information. The power interruption detection circuit 98 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and, when detecting a voltage drop, outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub CPU 91a.

  Sub CPU91a receives the command transmitted from game control board 40, performs various control for performing an effect, and controls each part of the control circuit mounted in effect control board 90 directly or indirectly. . Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). One of the interrupt terminals of the sub control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, among the command transmission lines, and the sub CPU 91a receives the strobe signal. Based on the input, an interrupt is generated, a command from the main control unit 41 is acquired, and a command reception interrupt process for storing in the buffer is executed. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes an interrupt process (sub), which will be described later, by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. One of the interrupt terminals of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to the power interruption detection circuit 98, and the sub CPU 91a responds to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98. Execute processing (sub). Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the sub CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91b is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise. The set value may be set in three stages such as 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, H (High), or in seven stages 1 to 7, and need not be limited to six stages.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41b is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the display returns to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41b of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In order to check the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on with no bet amount set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41b is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by turning the setting key switch 37 to the OFF state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the main CPU 41a detects a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48, a power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed. In the power interruption interrupt process (main), the main CPU 41a saves the stored value of the register in a stack of a RAM 41b described later, and the RAM 41b stores destruction diagnosis data in which any bit becomes 1 (in this embodiment, 5AH That is, specific data other than 0 is stored, and the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41b becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41b. Here, the RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41b. For this reason, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41b is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41b is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The main CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41b at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis The processing state of the main CPU 41a is returned to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41b on the condition that the value of the business data is also correct. However, when the RAM parity is not 0 (when 1) or the value of the data for destructive diagnosis is not correct, the main CPU 41a determines that the RAM is abnormal, sets a RAM abnormal error code in the register, and sets a RAM abnormal error. The state is changed to disable the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change state described above. It will not be released until

  In addition, when the sub CPU 91a detects the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98, the sub CPU 91a also executes a power interruption interrupt process (sub). In the power interruption processing (sub), the sub CPU 91a saves the stored value of the register in a stack of a RAM 91b described later, stores the destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 91b, and stores all of the RAM 91b. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in the area is 0, and the RAM parity is stored in the RAM 91b.

  Then, the sub CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91b at the time of activation, and based on the data stored in the RAM 91b on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. The processing state of the sub CPU 91a is restored to the state before power interruption. However, if the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1), the sub CPU 91a determines that the RAM is abnormal and initializes the RAM 91b. In this case, unlike the case of the main CPU 41a, only the RAM 91b is initialized, and the performance is not disabled.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41b of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41b of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data which is inconvenient if it is initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices, LED display data, I / O 41d input / output data, and game time counter. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out in the BB. The special work is a work that stores data that is initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. After initializing 0 before setting is started (before shifting to the setting change mode), 1 is stored. The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41b is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41b, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later, as in the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a is activated when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are ON, when a RAM error occurs, or when only the setting key switch 37 is ON. When the BB ends, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both turned off, the RAM 41b data is not destroyed. When it is established, five types of initialization are performed in different areas that are initialized according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and initialization is performed before the transition to the setting change mode or when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In the initialization 0, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) other than the used stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41b. Initialization 1 is an initialization performed only when the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, in the storage area of the RAM 41b, All the areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except for the in-use stack area and the stop phase work are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41b. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are OFF at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41b is not destroyed. The saved work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41b are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed before transition to the setting change mode, but may be performed at the end of the setting change mode, that is, after the setting is confirmed. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost. Therefore, the set value work is not initialized.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, a prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is set, and a prescribed number of bets that are set according to the gaming state are set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the gaming state includes a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB) and a normal gaming state. In any gaming state, 3 is the prescribed number of bets. Regardless of the game state, if 3 is set as the bet number, the game can be started. In this embodiment, all of the pay lines L1 to L5 are activated when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state are set.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels (the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R) are stopped, a symbol called a winning on the effective winning line (hereinafter simply referred to as a winning line). When the combination is complete, a prize will be awarded. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag for the winning combination in the RAM 41b.

  Of the winning flags for each of these roles, the winning flags for the small role and the replaying role are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It will be.

  As the role in this slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 9, a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB) and a big bonus (1), (2) (hereinafter referred to as BB (1), (2) as special roles. Is defined). In addition, watermelon, cherry, and bell are defined as small roles, and replay is defined as a replaying role.

  In any game state, a cherry is awarded when the combination of “Cherry-ANY-Bell” or “Cherry-ANY-Replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines for the left reel 2L, that is, in the left reel 2L. When a “Cherry” symbol is derived on one of the lines and a “Bell” or “Replay” symbol is derived on the winning line where “Cherry” is stopped on the left reel 2L, Two medals are paid out.

  The watermelon is awarded when the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out.

  The bell is awarded when a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 12 medals are paid out.

  Replay is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” is aligned on the winning line in the normal gaming state. When the replay wins, no medals are paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of wagers again, so three medals corresponding to the number of wagers that no longer require setting in the next game are paid out. This is essentially the same.

  RB is awarded when a combination of “net 7-net 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB, and the gaming state shifts to RB. The RB is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player over other gaming states by increasing the winning probability of the small role, especially the bell, and when the 12 games are digested after the RB starts, or a 4-game winning ( When the type of the combination is allowed), it ends either whichever comes first.

  BB (1) is awarded when a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. BB (2) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB.

  When BB (1) (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to BB and simultaneously shifts to RB. When RB ends, if BB has not ended, it shifts to RB again and BB ends. Until the RB state is controlled. In other words, the RB state is always controlled during BB. The BB ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the BB exceeds 480. At the end of the BB, the RB is also ended regardless of whether or not the RB end condition is satisfied.

  Next, the internal lottery of this embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, whether or not the above winnings are allowed is determined before the display results of all reels (left reel 2L, middle reel 2C and right reel 2R) are derived and displayed (in practice, (When the start switch 7 is detected). In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state and whether or not the special combination is carried over, the acquired random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values determined for each combination according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value A lottery will be performed according to

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or RB (BB), the role to be subject to the internal lottery differs, and in the normal gaming state, The subject of the internal lottery varies depending on whether the special role is being carried over (normal: normal game state in which the special role is not carried over, winning: normal game state in which the special role is carried over).

  RB, BB (1), BB (2), RB + watermelon, RB + cherry, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) if the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the special role is not carried over + Cherry, BB (2) + Watermelon, BB (2) + Cherry, Replay, Watermelon, Cherry, and Bell are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  If the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the special combination is carried over, the replay, watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read out as the target combinations for the internal lottery.

  If the gaming state is RB (BB), watermelon, cherry, and bell are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values for each combination determined in accordance with the current gaming state and set value is sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery. When the result of addition overflows, the winning combination is won. It is determined to be a thing. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the number of determination values.

  In the internal lottery, when any winning combination is determined, the main CPU 41a sets a winning flag corresponding to the winning combination determined in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM 41b. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when the special combination is won, the main CPU 41a sets a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is set. To clear. When the general combination is won, the main CPU 41a sets a general combination winning flag indicating that the general combination is won in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination or combination of winning combinations is won, only the general winning combination storing work is cleared.

  Next, stop control of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R will be described. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating, or when any of the reels stops and an unstopped reel remains, the main CPU 41a uses the table index and table creation stored in the ROM 41c. With reference to the data, a stop control table for each rotating reel is created. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected, the main CPU 41a refers to the stop control table of the corresponding reel and slips the referenced stop control table. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a detects an operation of any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, a control for deriving a display result to the corresponding reel will be described. When the main CPU 41a detects an operation of any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the main CPU 41a sets the number of steps from the reel reference position (for example, area 0) at the time when the stop operation is detected. First, the area number of the stop operation position is specified, the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected is referred to, and the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the specified area number of the stop operation position is acquired. Then, the main CPU 41a performs control to rotate and stop the reels by the acquired number of sliding frames. As a result, the region corresponding to the region number that is the stop position that is the number of sliding frames ahead of the region corresponding to the region number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the fluoroscopic window 3 in the lower symbol area).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state is stored. Further, only one address is stored in one table creation data as the storage area address of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status of one reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, the table creation data corresponding to the gaming state and the internal winning state, and the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined, The stop control table created by referring to these is also uniquely determined. For this reason, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the main CPU 41a performs control based on the same stop control table.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting a stop operation. That is, the symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five frames including the stop operation position at which the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. A symbol stop position can be specified from a maximum of 5 symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, when one of the winning combinations is won, a stop control table is generated so as to perform control to draw the winning combination to the maximum within a range of 4 frames on any winning line. Further, when no winning combination is won, a stop control table is generated so as to perform control in which no winning combination is aligned on the winning line. In other words, when any winning combination is won, if the stop operation is performed within the range of 4 winning combinations, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is controlled, for example, the number of sliding frames stops at 2 frames. There is nothing. In addition, when no winning combination is won, even if any winning combination is stopped within the range of 0 frames, since the number of sliding frames is set, control that does not match any winning combination is performed. .

  As shown in FIG. 7, the “bell” of the left reel 2L, the “bell” of the middle reel 2C, and the “bell” of the right reel 2R are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less. Regardless of the timing at which the reel stop operation is performed, the “bell-bell-bell” combination is always aligned on the winning line, and the bell wins. In addition, the “replay” of the left reel 2L, the “replay” of the middle reel 2C, and the “replay” of the right reel 2R are arranged at intervals of 4 frames each, and when the replay is won, each reel is stopped. Regardless of the timing, the “replay-replay-replay” combination is always on the winning line and the replay wins.

  On the other hand, the “cherries” of the left reel 2L are arranged at intervals of more than 7 frames. When the cherry is won, if the stop operation of the left reel 2L is performed at the timing of the “cherry” pull-in range, The combination of “ANY-Bell” or “Cherry-ANY-Replay” is aligned with the winning line and the cherry wins. On the other hand, if the stop operation of the right reel 2R is performed at a timing outside the “cherry” pull-in range, the cherry will not be won and will be missed.

  Also, the “watermelon” on the left reel 2L, the “watermelon” on the middle reel 2C, and the “watermelon” on the right reel 2R are located at intervals of more than 4 frames. If each reel is stopped at the timing of the drawing range, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on the winning line, and the watermelon wins. On the other hand, if any one of the reels is stopped at a timing outside the “watermelon” drawing range, the watermelon will not be won and will be lost.

  Also, for BB (1) to (2), there are places where the constituent symbols are arranged at intervals exceeding 4 frames, and even if any of BB (1) to (2) wins, the winning BB If the operation of stopping each reel is performed at a timing that is within the drawing range of the configuration symbol of, the winning BB will win, but at any one reel at a timing that is outside the drawing range of the configuration symbol of the winning BB When the stop operation is performed, BB is not won and is lost. Even if BB is missed as described above, it will be carried over to the next game, so if you win BB once, for example, even if you miss it, you can win by performing a stop operation at an appropriate timing after the next game It becomes possible to make it.

  If the special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or if the special role and the small role are elected at the same time without the special role being carried over, the special role and the small role are won simultaneously. If the winning small role is on the winning line, the number of sliding symbols is determined so that it is drawn to the maximum within the range of 4 frames, and the winning small role is 4 on the winning line. For stop operation positions that cannot be retracted within the range of frames, a stop control table is created in which the number of sliding frames is determined so that the selected special role is fully pulled within the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the reels are stopped. Take control. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't withdraw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop the special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, Control is performed to align and stop. In other words, the winning combination that is not won is controlled to be removed and stopped within the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be made effective only when the small combination cannot be drawn.

  In this embodiment, when a special role and a small role are won at the same time, priority is given to the control of aligning the small role on the winning line over the special role, and only when the small role cannot be withdrawn. Although it is a configuration that allows a winning combination to be awarded, priority is given to the control of aligning a special winning role on the winning line over a small winning role, and it is possible to win a winning role only when the special winning role cannot be drawn. It is good also as composition which becomes.

  The special role and re-playing role are selected when the re-playing role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when the special role and re-playing role are won at the same time without the special role being carried over. In the case of winning at the same time, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-playing combination are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames for all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Since it can be stopped at any position within the range, if the special combination and the re-playing combination are elected at the same time, the player always restarts regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. All gamers will win a prize. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win.

  In this embodiment, after the rotation of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R starts, the main CPU 41a has not detected the stop operation until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. Control is performed to stop the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the remaining reels is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels 2 that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected.

  In this embodiment, the control for stopping the corresponding reel is performed on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it may be assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control for automatically stopping each reel may be performed. . In this case, since the reel is stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won. .

  Next, commands that the main CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a gives a BET command, a credit command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a game to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a status command, standby command, abort command, error command, return command, setting start command, confirmation start command, confirmation end command, and operation detection command are transmitted.

  These commands are composed of 1-byte type data indicating the type of command and 1-byte extension data indicating the content of the command, and the sub CPU 91a can determine the type of command from the type data.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used for setting the number of bets. The BET command is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game. Sent when a medal is inserted or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the bet amount in a state where the number is not set. Further, since the BET command is transmitted when the betting number setting operation is performed, it is possible to specify that the betting number setting operation has been performed by receiving the BET command.

  The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, and in a state where a predetermined number of bets is set, Sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added.

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. Further, since the internal winning command is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated, it is possible to specify that the start switch 7 has been operated by receiving the internal winning command.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R is started.

  The reel stop command can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, or the right reel 2R, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. This command is transmitted every time stop control is performed in accordance with the stop operation of each reel. Since the reel stop command is transmitted when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, it is possible to specify that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated by receiving the reel stop command. .

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game, and is transmitted when the setting change state ends and when the game ends.

  The stand-by command is a command indicating a transition to the stand-by state. When a certain time elapses without shifting the bet amount after one game, the credit command (used to set the bet number is used). (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  The error command is a command indicating the occurrence or cancellation of an error state and the type of error state.When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, the error command indicating the occurrence of the error state and its type is transmitted, When the reset operation is performed and the error state is released, an error command indicating the release of the error state is transmitted.

  The return command is a command indicating that the main CPU 41a has returned to the control state before power interruption, and is transmitted when the main CPU 41a returns to the control state before power interruption.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change state, and is transmitted when shifting to the setting change state. Further, since the control state of the main CPU 41a is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it can be specified by the setting start command that the control state of the main CPU 41a has been initialized.

  The confirmation start command is a command indicating the start of the setting confirmation state, and is transmitted when shifting to the setting confirmation state. The confirmation end command is a command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state, and is transmitted when the setting confirmation state ends.

  The operation detection command is a command indicating the detection state (ON / OFF) of the operation switches (MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R), and is transmitted at regular intervals.

  Among these commands, the setting start command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, and the return command are generated at the stage before the interrupt is permitted in the startup process, and are sent to the specific command assigned to the special work in the RAM 41b. Stored in the trust buffer and sent immediately.

  Commands other than a setting start command, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality, a return command, and an operation detection command are generated according to the progress of the game in the game process, and are temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41b. Stored and transmitted in timer interrupt processing (main).

  In this embodiment, a command is generated in the game process and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. In the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main), when an untransmitted command stored in the command transmission buffer is detected, the untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  In addition, the normal command transmission buffer has an area where a plurality of commands can be stored, so that newly generated commands can be stored without waiting for transmission of unsent commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It can be stored in an empty area of the normal command transmission buffer.

  Further, when storing the commands in the normal command transmission buffer in the game process, the main CPU 41a stores these commands in the order in which they are generated. In the command transmission process, the main CPU 41a generates and stores the commands in the normal command transmission buffer. Send a command. That is, the commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated and stored.

  The operation detection command is generated every time the command transmission process is executed five times, stored in the above-described specific command transmission buffer, and immediately transmitted. In addition, when the operation detection command transmission time is reached with the unsent command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, priority is given to the transmission of the operation detection command and the normal command transmission buffer stores it. The untransmitted command is transmitted in the next command transmission process. That is, a plurality of commands are not transmitted in one command transmission process.

  Next, the effect control executed by the sub-control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating the transmission of a command from the main CPU 41a is input. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91b.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a is the earliest stage. Based on the received command, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91c is referred to, and various effects such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table. Control the output of the device.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub CPU 91a receives the command, the sub CPU 91a, among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91b in the game of the control pattern table, The control pattern corresponding to the received command type is referred to, and the output control of the rendering device is performed based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by reception of a certain command, the sub CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and responds to the newly received command. An effect based on the control pattern is executed. In other words, even when the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the currently executed production is canceled and a new command is issued unless the received command is a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on a simple command is executed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when the betting number setting operation is performed during execution of the effect, that is, when the sub CPU 91a receives a BET command indicating that the bet number is set, the effect being executed is displayed. Discontinue. For this reason, when the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the effect to the end, the effect is canceled and the next game can be started, so that the player is not bothered. Also, when a credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub CPU 91a receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, and before receiving an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. In addition, when the payout start command is received, the currently executed effect is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is terminated. In such a case, by terminating the performance that is being executed, there is an intention to end the game, but the performance continues unnecessarily. I try not to let you.

  The effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command when the internal winning command is received, and is set in the RAM 91b. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91c, and when the sub CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the sub CPU 91a sets the level and the effect setting described later as a result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. Accordingly, the selection rate registered in the effect table is referred to, one of the effect patterns is selected from the plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is stored in the RAM 91b as the effect pattern of the game. Set. In this case, even if the same command is received, a different control pattern is selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received. As a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a transmits to the sub CPU 91a an operation detection command that can specify that the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R have been operated. However, it is possible to specify that the operation switch detected by the main CPU 41a is operated regardless of whether the operation switch is involved in the game progress control in each control state. For this reason, the sub CPU 91a can execute an effect in accordance with an operation of an operation switch not involved in the game progress control, or can perform a process in accordance with a player's operation via a main menu screen described later. .

  Further, the main CPU 41a determines whether the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated regardless of whether the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. By periodically transmitting an operation detection command that can specify the ON / OFF state of the sub CPU 91a, the sub CPU 91a can periodically specify the ON / OFF state of these operation switches. For this reason, even when the operation detection command is missed, the sub CPU 91a can specify the latest detection state for all the operation switches based on the operation detection command transmitted next time, and control the progress of the game. An effect according to the operation of the operation switch not involved in the operation can be reliably executed.

  Further, since the sub CPU 91a can specify the detection states of all of the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R from the operation detection command, simultaneous operation of a plurality of switches and specific switches It is possible to produce effects that reflect the operation status of a plurality of operation switches such as only the operation, and it is possible to produce various effects using the operation of the operation switches.

  Note that in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a does not determine whether the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, or the stop switches 8L, 8C, or 8R is operated, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, or the stop switch. The operation detection command that can specify the ON / OFF state of each of 8L, 8C, and 8R is transmitted at regular intervals, but only when the detection state (ON / OFF) of any operation switch changes. You may make it transmit the operation detection command which shows that. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the transmission of operation detection commands as much as possible, and the control load related to the transmission of operation detection commands can be reduced, and the operation detection command is also received more than necessary on the sub CPU 91a side. You do n’t have to.

  When the detection state (ON / OFF) of any operation switch changes, an operation detection command that can specify the detection state of another operation switch in addition to the detection state of the operation switch is sent to the sub CPU 91a. It is good also as a structure which transmits. With this configuration, transmission of operation detection commands can be reduced as much as possible, and the sub CPU 91a can detect not only the detection state of the operation switch whose detection state has changed from the operation detection command, but also other operations. It becomes possible to specify the detection state of the means, and it is possible to produce effects reflecting the operation status of the plurality of operation means, and various effects using operation of the operation switches can be made.

  In the RAM 91b of the sub-control unit 91, a detection state storage area in which the change state of the detection state of the operation switch is stored for each operation switch, and an operation detection flag indicating that the operation state of the operation switch has changed are provided for each operation switch. An operation detection flag storage area to be stored is allocated. Furthermore, the detection state storage area is assigned with a detection state before receiving the operation detection command (previous) and a detection state after receiving the operation detection command (this time). The detection state of each operation switch before and after reception is stored.

  The sub CPU 91a performs an operation detection process when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (sub) that an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. In the operation detection process, it is determined whether the unprocessed command is an operation detection command. If it is determined that the command is an operation detection command, the current detection state stored in the detection state storage area is changed to the previous detection state. And the detection state of each operation switch indicated by the operation detection command is stored as the current detection state. At that time, when there is an operation switch in which the previous detection state and the current detection state are different, the sub CPU 91a sets a rising flag as an operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch. However, when the state changes from ON to OFF, a falling flag is set as an operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a periodically transmits an operation detection command that can specify the detection states of all the operation switches regardless of whether or not the detection state of the operation switches has changed. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91a receives the operation detection command, the sub CPU 91a updates the detection state of each operation switch before and after receiving the operation detection command stored in the detection state storage area, and there is an operation switch with a different detection state. In addition, an operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch is set. The sub CPU 91a confirms whether or not the operation detection flag is present, and in addition to the fact that the detection state of the operation switch has changed, how the detection state of each operation switch has changed before and after receiving the operation detection command, that is, OFF It can be determined whether it has changed from ON to ON or from ON to OFF.

  For this reason, the sub CPU 91a can perform an effect or change the effect according to not only the timing when the operation of the operation switch is started but also the timing when the operation is released, and is involved in the progress control of the game. Various effects can be performed according to the operation mode of the operation switches not to be performed.

  In this embodiment, the sub CPU 91a can determine how the detection state of each operation switch before and after receiving the operation detection command has changed in addition to the change in the detection state of the operation switch. However, the sub CPU 91a may be configured to be able to determine only that the operation switch has been operated, that is, that the operation has been changed from OFF to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load on the sub CPU 91a accompanying the operation of the operation switch that does not affect the game progress control.

  The detection state storage area stores the detection state of each operation switch, and the sub CPU 91a is set with any operation detection flag, and the change in the detection state of the operation switch corresponding to the operation detection flag is changed. When it is identified, it is possible to identify not only the operation switch whose detection state has changed but also the detection state of other operation switches by checking the detection state of other operation switches in the detection state storage area. .

  For this reason, the sub CPU 91a can specify a state in which a plurality of operation switches are operated at the same time, can perform an effect by operating the plurality of operation switches at the same time, and how to operate the plurality of operation switches. Can produce a variety of performances.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a performs an effect by operating the operation switches of the left stop switch 8L and the middle stop switch 8C at the same time, the left stop switch 8L is detected and the right stop switch 8R is detected. If an operation of the middle stop switch 8C is detected in a state where there is no such effect, a corresponding effect is performed. However, when the operation of the middle stop switch 8C is detected in a state where both the left stop switch 8L and the right stop switch 8R are detected, the operation of the left stop switch 8L and the middle stop switch 8C is performed as described above. In this case, the corresponding effects are not performed.

  That is, when performing a specific operation effect according to the operation of a specific operation switch, if an operation switch other than the specific operation switch is operated together with the specific operation switch, the specific operation effect is not performed. It has become.

  For this reason, a specific operation effect based on an operation of a specific operation switch is performed when the specific operation switch is operated at the same time as another operation switch, or when the other operation switch is operated. Is not executed, and a specific operation effect is not executed by an erroneous operation. For this reason, a specific operation effect can be provided only to a player who desires a specific operation effect.

  In addition, when an operation switch other than the specific operation switch is operated together with the specific operation switch as described above, a part of the operation switches for executing each effect by not performing the specific operation effect. Even in the case of overlapping, it is possible to execute different effects. That is, one effect is executed by operating the left stop switch 8L and the middle stop switch 8C simultaneously, and the other effect is executed by operating the middle stop switch 8C and the right stop switch 8R simultaneously. However, when the middle stop switch is operated while the left stop switch and the right stop switch are operated at the same time, whether the left stop switch and the middle stop switch are operated simultaneously, or the middle stop switch and the right stop switch are operated simultaneously. It is impossible to determine whether the operation is performed, and it is only possible to assign an effect only to one of the simultaneous operations. However, when an operation switch other than a specific operation switch is operated together with a specific operation switch, by not performing a specific operation effect, even in the above case, each simultaneous operation can be performed. It is possible to assign effects, and more various effects can be performed depending on how the operation switches are operated.

  In this embodiment, the sub CPU 91a gives an experience value on the condition that a predetermined achievement condition is satisfied when a password (key data) described later is input by the player at the start of the game. Each time 10 experience points are acquired, the level is added. Each time the level value exceeds a certain value, the number of types of effects that may be executed is increased. More specifically, it includes an effect table 1 used for levels 1 to 30, an effect table 2 used for levels 31 to 60, and an effect table 3 used for levels 61 to 99. In addition to the effect patterns registered in the effect table 1, effect patterns that are not registered in the effect table 1 are defined, and the effect table 3 includes the effect patterns registered in the effect tables 1 and 2. An effect pattern that is not registered in the effect tables 1 and 2 is defined, and the level exceeds 30 by selecting an effect pattern using the effect table corresponding to the current level among the effect tables 1 to 3. In this case, when the number exceeds 60, the production pattern increases.

  The experience value is stored in the experience value storage area assigned to the RAM 91b.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a increases the items that can be selected as the effect setting every time the level value exceeds a certain value. More specifically, the frequency of production (production setting 1), main character (production setting 2), character costume (production setting 3), production background design (production setting 4), BGM ( The production setting 5) can be selected, and in these production settings, it is possible to select from 3 types until the level exceeds 30, and when the level exceeds 30, it becomes possible to select from 5 types and exceeds the level 60 And 8 types can be selected.

  As an achievement condition to which an experience value is given, for example, as shown in FIG. 11, when a continuous effect indicating the possibility of winning a special role is executed and the special role is won or missed, a bonus confirmation screen is displayed. The case where it is displayed is determined, the difficulty level of each achievement condition, the current level, the experience value given according to the number of games since the game was started is determined, and when the achievement condition is established Experience values according to the situation will be given.

  The continuous effect B shown in FIG. 11 is an effect indicating that the possibility of winning the special role is higher than the continuous effect A, that is, an effect in which the ratio selected at the time of winning the special role is higher than the continuous effect A. It is an effect whose appearance rate is lower than that of the continuous effect A.

  And when the continuous production A is executed and the special role is not won, and when the continuous production B is executed and the special role is not won, the latter has more experience values. Even if there is a high possibility that a special role has been won, more experience points will be given if the special role is not won .

  Moreover, when the continuous production A is executed and the special role is not won, and when the continuous production A is executed and the special role is won, the latter has more experience points. Even if the possibility of winning a special role is low, more experience points will be given if a special role is won. .

  Moreover, even when the same achievement condition is satisfied, the experience value given by 0 to 499G, 500 to 699G, and 700G or more is different, so that as the number of games increases, more experience value is given. It has become.

  Further, every time the level value exceeds a certain value, the experience value to be given decreases, and the experience value to be given decreases. Specifically, when the level exceeds 30 and when the level exceeds 60, the experience value assigned is decreased, and the experience value is not assigned depending on the achievement condition. For this reason, every time the level exceeds a certain value, it becomes difficult to further increase the level.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, an experience value is given when the achievement condition corresponding to the result of playing the game is established, the level increases according to the experience value, and the production pattern increases. In addition, the setting items for production increase, and the player's willingness to play a game can be effectively enhanced.

  Note that the achievement conditions include conditions other than the conditions shown in FIG. 11, for example, including conditions for obtaining a result of achievement of a specific mission.

  In this embodiment, the sub CPU 91a satisfies a predetermined condition in the game when the player inputs a password (to be described later) or selects “Easy Start” at the start of the game. Then, coins (three types of gold, silver, and copper), which are exchange values when receiving a predetermined privilege from the management server 1200, are awarded to the player. The privilege includes, for example, content data such as music, wallpaper, a standby screen, or data (for example, a two-dimensional code) indicating an exchange ticket that can be exchanged for a predetermined article.

  FIG. 12A shows a coin acquisition specification when a password is input. For example, when a bonus (which may be either BB or RB) is won, one coin of gold, silver and bronze is awarded with a probability of 50%. In addition, at the time of cherry acquisition (specifically, at the time of winning), one coin of gold, silver and bronze is awarded with a probability of 100%. In addition, every time 2000 games are consumed, one of gold, silver, and copper coins is awarded with a probability of 100%. However, as the number of games increases, the probability of giving a good-colored coin (copper → gold or silver, silver → gold) is increased.

  Also, when a mission is completed, coins are awarded with a probability of 100% according to the level of the achieved mission. For example, when a high level mission is achieved, one gold, one silver and one copper coin is awarded. In addition, when a mission in the level is completed, any two coins of gold, silver, and copper are awarded, and when a mission of a low level is achieved, any one of the coins of gold, silver, and copper is awarded. Is done. In addition to the acquisition of coins between such games, as will be described in detail later, when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the game, coins are awarded to the player.

  Further, when the mission of high level and medium is achieved, a coin to be given is added on condition that there is a stock coin described later. In this case, for example, when a mission of a high level is achieved, any two of gold, silver, and copper coins are added, and when a mission during the level is achieved, any of gold, silver, and copper coins is given. One additional card is added.

  In this embodiment, the advantage of coin acquisition conditions differs between when a password is entered and when "Easy Start" is selected, and "Easy Start" is more effective when a password is entered. Coins can be obtained more advantageously than if selected.

  FIG. 12B shows a coin acquisition specification when “easy start” is selected. For example, when a bonus (which can be either BB or RB) is won, one gold, one silver and one bronze coin is awarded with a probability of 25%. In addition, at the time of cherry acquisition (specifically, at the time of winning), one coin each of gold, silver, and copper is awarded with a probability of 50%. Further, every time 2000 games are consumed, one of gold, silver and copper coins is awarded with a probability of 50%. However, as the number of games increases, the probability of giving a good-colored coin (copper → gold or silver, silver → gold) is increased.

  Also, at the time of mission completion, coins are awarded with a probability of 50% according to the level of the mission completed. For example, when a high level mission is achieved, one gold, one silver and one copper coin is awarded. In addition, when a mission in the level is completed, any two coins of gold, silver, and copper are awarded, and when a mission of a low level is achieved, any one of the coins of gold, silver, and copper is awarded. Is done. In addition to the acquisition of coins between such games, as will be described in detail later, when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the game, coins are awarded to the player.

  Further, when the mission of high level and medium is achieved, a coin to be given is added on condition that there is a stock coin described later. In this case, for example, when a mission of a high level is achieved, any two of gold, silver, and copper coins are added, and when a mission during the level is achieved, any of gold, silver, and copper coins is given. One additional card is added.

  When a coin is awarded to the player, the acquired data (data indicating the number of acquired gold, silver and bronze coins) stored in the acquired coin area allocated to the RAM 91b is updated according to the content of the coin. Is done.

  In addition, in this embodiment, an effect that is executed on condition that the level is a certain level or more, the cumulative number of games, the cumulative bonus number, etc. is a certain number or more is prepared. There is a mission that is achieved by executing an effect that does not appear unless the level is higher than a certain level, the number of accumulated games or the number of bonuses is more than a certain number, and the player plays a game and the level The willingness to raise can also be increased effectively.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a sequentially advances the stages of the story displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in accordance with the number of games in the game when a password described later is input at the start of the game. Specifically, depending on the number of games, when the story reaches a certain stage, the next stage is developed.

  In addition, when a password, which will be described later, is input at the start of the game, the sub CPU 91a, when the anniversary specified from the input password indicates a specific anniversary, the anniversary effect ( For example, when the birthday of the player is specified, it is possible to execute an effect that congratulates the player by satisfying certain conditions.

  Further, the value of the level can take over not only the value increased in one slot machine 1 but also the value increased in other slot machines 1. Further, not only the level value but also the stage of the story developed in the other slot machine 1 or when the player changes the production setting in the other slot machine 1, the setting contents can be taken over.

  Specifically, the player selects “password input” from the main menu screen shown in FIG. 13A, and inputs a password issued in advance by the management server 1200, thereby responding to the previous game history. It is possible to play the game by taking over the level and production setting (including the stage of the story).

  The password (key data), which will be described in detail later, identifies the anniversary, level, model information, latest information, and other performance settings according to the player's individual game history managed by the management server 1200 described later. This is character data consisting of 8 possible characters.

  The main menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 when the effect switch 56 (CHANCE button) is operated in the control state from the end of the game (after the setting change) until the bet amount is set. Is done.

  When the main menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, when the stop switch 8L is operated, the menu item on the left side is moved and the stop switch 8R is operated. To move to the right menu item. Then, when the effect switch 56 is operated, the menu item displayed in front is selected. When the effect switch 56 is operated in a state in which “End” is displayed in front as a menu item, or when the stop switch 8C is operated for a predetermined time or longer, as shown in FIG. An end confirmation screen in which “YES” and “NO” can be selected is displayed. By operating the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 on this end confirmation screen and selecting “YES” from “YES” and “NO”, the basic screen (normal before moving to the main menu screen) Screen). In addition, the screen returns to the basic screen when no operation is continued for a predetermined time for each screen.

  On the main menu screen before entering the password or before starting the game by the simple start described later, as shown in FIG. 13A, “easy start”, “password entry”, “member registration”, “stock coin hint” , "End" menu item is displayed.

  In the main menu screen in this case, the player operates the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 to select “stock coin hints”, so that the player is shown in FIGS. Such a stock coin hint screen can be displayed. The stock coins are coins (three types of gold, silver, and copper) that are added and accumulated when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the game in the slot machine 1 regardless of whether or not a password is input. Data indicating stock coins (stock coin data) is stored in a stock coin storage area allocated to the RAM 91b.

  The stock specification of this stock coin is shown in FIG. For example, if a bonus (which may be either BB or RB) is won, one of gold, silver and bronze coins is stocked with a probability of 100%. Further, every time 100 games are consumed, one of gold, silver and copper coins is stocked with a probability of 20%.

  When a new coin is stocked, the stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area allocated to the RAM 91b is updated according to the content of the coin.

  When the “stock coin hint” is selected by the player, the sub CPU 91a refers to the stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area, and according to the state of the accumulated coin (FIG. One of the hint screens shown in a) to (d) is selected and displayed. In this case, for example, when the screen (a) is displayed in FIG. 14, it is suggested that the value of the accumulated coin is not high, and when the screen (d) is displayed, the coin is accumulated. This suggests that the value of the coin is very high (for example, the number of gold coins is a predetermined number or more).

  The stock coin is given to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the game. Therefore, by displaying the screen that serves as a hint of stock coins in this way, the player can predict how much stock coins are accumulated before entering the password, and there are more stock coins This makes it possible to select the game machines that have been accumulated, and to improve the interest.

  The stock coin data is reset at a predetermined timing. In this embodiment, the slot machine 1 is reset when the power is turned on and when a predetermined time (for example, 20 hours) has elapsed since the power was turned on. In the resetting, the stock coin storage area is cleared, and the value content is different (that is, the combination of gold, silver, and copper is different). And the determined stock coin data is stored in the stock coin storage area.

  When the player selects “stock coin hint” within a predetermined time (for example, one hour) after the above resetting, the sub CPU 91a determines the value of the stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area. Regardless of the contents, one predetermined screen among the screens shown in FIGS. 14A to 14D is displayed. By doing in this way, it becomes difficult for a player to determine whether or not stock coin data has been reset, and it is possible to improve interest.

  Next, password input operation specifications will be described. When the player selects the password menu by operating the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 on the main menu screen before inputting the password or before starting the game by the simple start described later, the sub CPU 91a causes the sub CPU 91a to select the password menu. The password input screen shown in (b) is displayed. On the password input screen, as shown in FIG. 15 (c), the characters are moved by operating the stop switches 8L and 8R, and as shown in FIG. 16 (a), the effect switch 56 (CHANCE button) is pressed. By operating, the character displayed in front is selected.

  Here, every time one character is selected, the next character can be selected. Further, by operating the effect switch 56 in a state where “return one character” is displayed in the foreground, it is possible to select the foreground character again. Then, when an 8-character password is selected, the process moves to “OK”, and as shown in FIG. 16B, the effect switch 56 is operated with characters other than “return one character” displayed in front. This completes the password entry.

  When the input password is authenticated as a regular password, as shown in FIG. 16C, a “password OK” screen indicating that the password input has been accepted is displayed. The password OK screen is closed by operating the effect switch 56 or when a predetermined time has elapsed, and is switched to the basic screen. If the password is not authenticated as a legitimate password, a “password NG” screen (not shown) indicating that password input has not been accepted is displayed. The password NG screen is also closed by operating the effect switch 56 or when a predetermined time has elapsed, and is switched to the basic screen.

  If the password is authenticated as a regular password, the values of the personal history storage area (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, achievement mission history) assigned to the RAM 91b are initialized and analyzed from the password. Is stored in the anniversary storage area allocated to the RAM 91b, the level analyzed from the password is stored in the level storage area allocated to the RAM 91b, and the model information for identifying the model analyzed from the password is The latest information indicating the latest game history analyzed from the password is stored in the model information storage area allocated to the RAM 91b, and the other effect settings 1 to 3 analyzed from the password are stored in the latest information storage area allocated to the RAM 91b. The effect setting storage area assigned to the RAM 91b is set. Then, with the above settings, the level according to the previous game history and the effect settings are handed over to the slot machine 1. At this time, the input password itself is stored in a password storage area assigned to the RAM 91b.

  Next, a procedure for analyzing the input password will be described. In the ROM 91c, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), a password analysis table in which numerical values of 0 to 31 are defined in advance corresponding to the characters constituting the password (32 types of Roman letters: 26 types and 6 types of symbols). It is remembered. As shown in FIG. 17B, the sub CPU 91a refers to the password analysis table and replaces the input password with a corresponding numerical value. For example, as shown in FIG. 17B, if the password is “KZFJC = U *”, “10-25-5-9-2-26-20-” according to the password analysis table shown in FIG. 30 ”. Next, the replaced numerical value is converted into a binary number, and the value of a total of 4 bits including the upper 2 bits and the lower 2 bits is specified as a random value (random value acquired at the time of password issuance by the management server 1200), and the random value The 36-bit value excluding the value is shifted to the right by the random value. For example, as shown in FIG. 17B, if the random value is 0110 (= 6), the 36-bit value excluding the random value is shifted rightward by 6 bits. At this time, the value overflowed in the right direction is shifted to the upper bits.

  Next, a hash value from the 36-bit value after the shift (a random number given by the management server 1200 to vary the password, and in this embodiment, the lower-order of the 36 bits excluding the random value Except for the 4th bit, the lower 8th bit, the lower 16th bit, the lower 23th bit, the lower 28th bit, and the lower 33th bit), from the 30-bit value obtained thereby, Analyze level, model information, latest information, and other performance settings.

  Of these 30-bit values, the lower 3 bits indicate the anniversary, the lower 4 bits to the lower 11 bits indicate the level, and the lower 12 bits to the lower 24 bits indicate the rendering settings 1 to 3, 5 bits, 4 bits, and 4 bits are assigned, respectively. The lower 25 bits to the lower 27 bits indicate the latest information, and the lower 28 bits to the lower 30 bits indicate the model information. Anniversary, level, model information, latest information, and other presentation settings specified from these values are set in the anniversary storage area, level storage area, model information storage area, latest information storage area, and presentation setting storage area, respectively. Will be.

  The lower 25 bits of the first bit of the latest information indicate whether or not the previous number of games is 700G or less, and is set to “1” when 700G or less. The lower 26 bits of the second bit of the latest information indicate whether or not the previous BB count is 10 or more, and is set to “1” when it is 10 or more. Of the latest information, the lower 27 bits of the third bit indicate whether or not one month or more has elapsed since the previous game, and is set to “1” when one or more months have elapsed.

  The model information is, for example, information indicating a distinction between a model series, a model name, a model specification, and the like.

  Further, as described above, the personal history storage area is allocated to the RAM 91b, and a game history (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs) after the password is input and authenticated as a regular password is accumulated. It has become so. Further, when a mission (issue) set in advance in the slot machine 1 is achieved, a history of achievement missions indicating the types of missions achieved is also accumulated. Further, as described above, with regard to the experience value, every time 10 experience values are acquired, the level stored in the level storage area is increased by one.

  When the player finishes the game, the player's game history, current level, experience value, number of acquired coins, production settings (model information and latest information are not included), achievement mission history, etc. A two-dimensional code including information (game result information) is output from the slot machine 1 and acquired using the mobile terminal 1100, and the management server 1200 includes game result information included in the two-dimensional code, which will be described later. It can be reflected in the contents of the player database.

  Note that if “Easy Start” is selected on the main menu screen by the player, unlike the case of entering the password, the player cannot take over the previous game history, but the player Includes game history, current level, experience value, number of acquired coins, production settings (excluding model information and latest information), history of achievement missions, etc., after selecting “Easy Start” until the end of the game 2 The dimension code can be output from the slot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, on the main menu screen after entering the password or after the game is started by simple start, the menu items of “DATA CLEAR”, “CREATE 2D CODE”, “TODAY RESULT”, “END” Is displayed. For example, when “DATA CLEAR” is selected by the player on the main menu screen in this case, the password storage area, the personal history storage area, the experience value storage area, the anniversary storage area, Each of the level storage area, the model information storage area, the latest information storage area, the effect setting storage area, and the acquired coin storage area is cleared.

  When “today's result” is selected by the player on the main menu screen shown in FIG. 13B, the game history from the start of the game after the password input or simple start to the present time, the current The level, experience value, contents of earned coins, achievement mission history, etc. are displayed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the player selects “2D code creation” on the main menu screen, the sub CPU 91a generates a 2D code, and FIG. As shown, the generated two-dimensional code is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In the two-dimensional code displayed here, for example, in the case of a game in which a password is input, as shown in FIG. 20C, a URL (normal update URL) indicating the location of the normal update page on the management server 1200 is displayed. ), A password entered at the start of the game, a game random number (in this embodiment, a 32-bit random number) that is acquired every time a two-dimensional code is created, game history update data, and acquired data And information indicating each of them. Here, the game history update data and the acquired data constitute game result information.

  In the game history update data, each data value (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, achievement mission history) stored in the personal history storage area, level value and experience value stored in the level storage area are stored. Experience values stored in the area, effects settings 1 to 3 stored in the effect setting storage area, and the like are stored.

  Further, the acquired data has the same contents as the acquired data (data indicating the number of acquired coins of gold, silver and copper) stored in the acquired coin storage area.

  Here, in the two-dimensional code, the total number of games (0 to 9999 games) is 14 bits, the number of BBs (0 to 127) is 7 bits, the number of RBs (0 to 63) is 6 bits, level The value (0 to 199) is 8 bits, the experience value (0 to 999) is 10 bits, and the production settings 1 to 3 (respectively 0 to 99) are 7 bits (total 7 × 3 = 21 bits), 100 bits are used for the types of missions achieved (100 types). Therefore, a total of 166 bits are used for the game history update data.

  On the other hand, 4 bits (4 × 3 = 12 bits in total) are used for the acquired data (the number of gold coins, the number of silver coins, and the number of copper coins (0 to 15 respectively)). 12 bits are used for.

  In this way, the acquisition data used for granting a privilege such as an item can be handled only by the data amount of information related to the granting of the game, unlike the game history update data used for outputting the game history. The proportion occupied can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the experience value stored in the experience value storage area is the remaining fractional experience value (that is, 0 to 9) used for level-up.

  Then, the two-dimensional code is read by the portable terminal 1100 and accessed to the URL of the management server 1200 specified from the two-dimensional code, so that the content specified from the two-dimensional code is the content of the player database included in the management server 1200. To be reflected.

  In the output of the two-dimensional code, as shown in FIG. 19 (b), when the case is output without production, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, stock coins are acquired as shown in FIG. There is a case where it is output along with a JACKPOT effect indicating a lottery effect. Details of the JACKPOT effect will be described later.

  Note that the input of a new password is prohibited until the two-dimensional code is displayed after the password is authenticated. A two-dimensional code is displayed, and when switching to the basic screen by operating the effect switch 56, the password storage area, the personal history storage area, the experience value storage area, the anniversary storage area, and the level storage assigned to the RAM 91b. Each of the area, the model information storage area, the latest information storage area, the effect setting storage area, and the acquired coin storage area is cleared, and the password input is permitted again.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, by inputting the password when starting the game, the past game history such as the level and effect setting when the previous game was played is reflected (taken over). ) It is possible to execute an effect, and it is possible to perform an effect that is continuous over a long period of time. In addition, since the password is included in the two-dimensional code including the game result information after the game is completed, the password is issued by authenticating the password included in the two-dimensional code in the management server 1200 that issues the password. It is possible to determine whether or not the player is a received player. Therefore, even if a third party obtains another person's password and plays a game to obtain a two-dimensional code, or obtains another person's two-dimensional code, the game result information contained in the two-dimensional code is managed. It cannot be reflected in a player database, which will be described later, included in the server 1200. As a result, it is meaningless even if the password or two-dimensional code is diverted or stolen, so that the diversion or theft of the password and two-dimensional code can be prevented.

  As will be described in detail later, the password issued by the management server 1200 changes depending on a random value that changes every time it is issued, so the same password is used even when the same game history is specified. It's not easy to guess the password.

  In this embodiment, in order to receive the issuance of a password from the management server 1200, the mobile server 1100 is used to access the management server 1200 in advance, perform membership registration, and the terminal identification information (SIM) of the mobile terminal 1100 Data) must be registered. In this embodiment, when “member registration” is selected on the main menu screen shown in FIG. 13A by the player, the sub CPU 91a specifies the URL indicating the location of the member registration page of the management server 1200. The generated two-dimensional code (see FIG. 20A) is generated and displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The player can easily access the member registration page of the management server 1200 by reading the two-dimensional code with the portable terminal 1100.

  FIG. 50A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the display unit 140 when the mobile terminal 1100 is reading a two-dimensional code. As described above, the image of the two-dimensional code is displayed in the portable terminal 1100 in a state where the photographed two-dimensional code is displayed within a frame in the display screen while being focused by autofocus. Is taken in. Then, the read two-dimensional code is analyzed by a general two-dimensional code reading application program included in the mobile terminal 1100.

  FIG. 50B is a diagram illustrating a state in which a URL as a two-dimensional code analysis result is displayed on the display unit 140 of the mobile terminal 1100. As described above, the URL indicating the location of a predetermined web page such as the member registration page of the management server 1200 is displayed on the display unit 140. Then, by selecting this URL, it is possible to access a predetermined web page of the management server 1200 indicated by this URL.

  Further, in this embodiment, even a player who has not previously registered as a member by accessing the management server 1200 can select the above-mentioned “easy start” on the main menu screen to obtain the game history. A game using the accumulated function can be started. However, in this case, of course, it is not possible to play a game by taking over the previous game history.

  After the game is started by selecting “Easy Start”, the two-dimensional code displayed when the game is ended is different from the case where the password is entered and started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20B, instead of the normal update URL, the URL indicating the location of the easy start page on the management server is included, and the password is not included. It has become. Other information is the same as the two-dimensional code based on the game in which the password is input.

  Then, the player reads this two-dimensional code with the portable terminal 1100 and accesses the URL of the management server 1200 specified from the read two-dimensional code. The management server 1200 determines whether the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the accessed mobile terminal has already been registered. When the terminal identification information of the accessed mobile terminal is not registered, the management server 1200 stores player information (details will be described later) for the player associated with the terminal identification information. Newly registered in the database, the game result information included in the two-dimensional code output from the slot machine 1 is reflected in the added player information.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information of the accessed mobile terminal has already been registered, the management server 1200 is included in the player information associated with the terminal identification information in the player database in the two-dimensional code. Reflect game result information.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the membership is registered, the player accumulates the game history only by selecting “easy start” on the main menu screen. A game using the function can be started.

  The sub CPU 91a of this embodiment displays the various menu screens that shift from the main menu screen as described above, and if no operation is performed by the player, when the predetermined time elapses, the sub CPU 91a displays the basic screen. It is supposed to switch.

  In addition, when the player inputs a password or “Easy Start” is selected, the sub CPU 91a produces an effect different from the effect mode (normal effect mode) when these operations are not performed. The control state is changed to the specific effect mode which is a mode.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 18, specific display areas 51a and 51b are assigned to a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. In the normal display mode, as shown in FIG. Only regular patterns are displayed in the specific effect areas 51a and 51b.

  On the other hand, when controlled to the specific effect mode, as shown in FIG. 18B, the specific effect area 51a displays a character based on the effect setting set by the player. In 51b, an experience value meter indicating the level value (level value specified from the password) of the player and the experience value required until the next level rise is displayed. The target displayed in the specific effect areas 51a and 51b in the specific effect mode is not limited to the above, and for example, the achievement status of the mission may be displayed.

  However, in the specific effect mode by selecting “Easy Start”, the effect setting, the level value, and the like cannot be specified. Therefore, in the specific effect area 51a, there is a character based on the default effect setting, not the effect setting set by the player. The level value and the experience value meter are also displayed in the specific effect area 51b based on the default values (for example, 0 for the level value and 0 level for the experience value meter).

  Further, regardless of whether in the normal effect mode or the specific effect mode, the sub CPU 91a deletes the specific effect areas 51a and 51b when the stop switch 8C is operated for a predetermined time or more while the basic screen is displayed. In the default setting, the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are displayed, and a game start operation (input of a password or selection of “easy start”) according to the present system or a game When an end operation (selection of “data clear” or “two-dimensional code creation”) is performed, even if the specific effect areas 51a and 51b have been erased so far, the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are displayed again. The

  In this embodiment, in the specific effect mode and the normal effect mode, the display modes in the areas other than the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are the same, and the same effect is performed. For example, regardless of the effect mode, an effect that rains in the background is performed, which suggests the result of the internal lottery.

  As described above, the display modes in the areas other than the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are the same, but in the specific effect mode, for example, the display contents of the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are displayed in accordance with the winning expectation degree of the special role. It is also possible to produce effects that change.

  As described above, since the display modes of the areas other than the specific effect areas 51a and 51b can be shared between the specific effect mode and the normal effect mode, it is possible to reduce the volume of image data and moving image data to be used.

  Note that the game history displayed in the specific effect area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is not limited to the level value and experience value as described above, but the accumulated game number, accumulated bonus number, and the above-described effect execution conditions. The level value, the accumulated number of games, the remaining value up to the accumulated bonus number, and the like may be displayed.

  Next, the management server 1200 to which the management apparatus of the present invention is applied will be described. As described above, the management server 1200 is configured to include hardware equivalent to a general server computer, and can perform data communication with the mobile terminal 1100 via the Internet network 900. The management server 1200 performs registration and update of game information corresponding to the player, issuance of a password, provision of a privilege, and the like according to the access request content from the mobile terminal 1100. In this embodiment, the management server 1200 can be accessed only from a mobile terminal to which terminal identification information (SIM data) is assigned, and a mobile terminal or terminal identification to which no terminal identification information is assigned. Although information is given, access from a portable terminal that refuses transmission of terminal identification information is denied.

  The management server 1200 includes a player database for managing game information of the player, a game history database for managing a history of game results for each game of the player, and privilege data given to the player. A privilege database for managing information.

  In the player database, as shown in FIG. 22A, terminal identification information (SIM data) that can identify the portable terminal 1100 owned by the player, current status (standby / game), password (last ), Total number of games to date, total number of BBs, total number of RBs, current level, experience value (of fractions), earned coins (number of gold, silver and bronze coins), points, Player information consisting of points, setting contents of production settings 1 to 3, achievement status for each mission (1 for missions that have been achieved, 0 for missions that have not been achieved), etc., is classified by player (by terminal identification information). It is registered. In addition to this, the player information also includes the player name (registered name), gender, date of birth, personal information (member information) of the player such as the prefecture, although not shown. .

  In the game history database, as shown in FIG. 22B, terminal identification information (SIM data) that can identify the portable terminal 1100 owned by the player who played the game, the game date and time, the slot machine 1 at the start of the game , The game random number randomly acquired by the slot machine 1 at the end of the game, the number of games in the game, the number of BBs in the game, the number of RBs in the game, the end of the game Level value at the time, experience value at the end of the game (number of fractions), number of gold, silver and copper coins acquired in the game, setting contents of the effect settings 1 to 3 at the end of the game, The game history information including the achievement status by mission in the game is registered.

  In the privilege database, as shown in FIG. 22 (c), the storage location of privilege data (content data or a two-dimensional code indicating a replacement ticket or an application ticket) corresponding to a privilege ID that can identify the privilege. Privilege data information including the type of privilege data, the type of condition for granting a privilege, the condition value of the corresponding type, and the like is registered. As the type of condition, coins, points, points (details will be described later), level, mission achievement rate, number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, etc. can be set. Type, number of sheets, number of points, number of points, etc.) can be set.

  Next, timer interrupt processing (sub) executed by the sub control unit 91 at intervals of 1.12 seconds based on the count value of the internal clock will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the timer interrupt process (sub), first, the register in use is saved in the stack area (step S4001).

  Next, a power failure determination process is performed (step S4002). In the power failure determination process, it is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input from the power failure detection circuit 98. If a voltage drop signal is input, whether or not the voltage drop signal is input in the previous power failure determination process as well. If a voltage drop signal has been input in the previous power failure determination process, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and a power interruption flag indicating that is set.

  After the power failure determination process in step S4002, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is set (step S4003). If the power interruption flag is set, the process proceeds to a power interruption process (sub). In the power interruption process (sub), the above-described process of storing the destruction diagnosis data, the RAM parity adjustment data, and the like in the RAM 91c is executed.

  If the power interruption flag is not set, command analysis processing is executed (step S4004). In the command analysis process, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the command buffer. If the command is stored in the command buffer, the command is acquired from the command buffer. And the process according to the acquired command is performed. After the command analysis process is completed, the main menu display process shown in FIG. 24 is executed (step S4005).

  In the main menu display process, a process of displaying a main menu according to whether or not a password is input is executed. After execution of the main menu display process, a pre-password input main menu operation process shown in FIG. 25 is executed (step S4006).

  In the main menu operation processing before password input, processing related to operations performed on each menu displayed before password input is executed. After the main menu operation process before password input, a level / coin related process is executed (step S4007).

  In the level / coin-related processing, processing related to experience level and level-up to be described later, processing related to giving coins (three types of gold, silver, and bronze) that are rights to receive item grants are executed. After the level / coin related process, the main menu operation process is executed after the password is input (step S4008).

  In the main menu operation process after password input, a process for displaying the main menu when the portable terminal 1100 is detected by the photoelectric sensor 57 and a process related to an operation performed on each menu displayed after the password is input are executed. . After the password input and after the main menu operation process, a special effect execution process is executed (step S4009).

  In the special effect execution process, a process for executing the special effect is executed when the photoelectric sensor 57 detects the player's action during the game.

  Next, the sub CPU 91a executes a predetermined effect process for performing a process for determining the presence / absence and type of execution of the predetermined effect and a process for executing the predetermined effect (step S4010). In this embodiment, the “predetermined effect” means an advantageous possibility suggesting whether or not the advantageous game state is controlled as an effect result (in this example, whether or not a bonus is won internally). This is an effect in which a privilege grant suggestion result indicating that a result or a privilege has been granted (in this example, a coin has been acquired) is notified after the effect of the common mode is executed. In this embodiment, as will be described later, an effect in a form in which a sphere rotates a roulette is executed as a predetermined effect. Further, the predetermined effect is started at the timing of starting a new game, and the effect result is stopped and displayed at the timing immediately before the stop operation of each reel is enabled.

  Next, when the sub CPU 91a finishes the predetermined effect process, the timer interrupt process (sub) ends.

  Although not shown, in the timer interrupt process (sub), a process for executing a bonus game or a normal game is also performed.

  Next, the contents of each process executed in response to an operation via the player's main menu screen will be described in detail.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main menu display process (the process of S4005 of the timer interrupt process (sub) shown in FIG. 23) executed in the slot machine 1. First, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the current gaming state is a state from the end of the game (after the setting change) until the bet amount is set (step S2201). When it is determined that the state is not in this state (step S2201; NO), the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is between the end of the game and the time when the bet number is set (step S2201; YES), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the current control state is the specific effect mode. (Step S2202).

  When it is not the specific effect mode, that is, in the normal effect mode (step S2202; NO), the sub CPU 91a displays the main menu screen before the password input (before “easy start” selection) as shown in FIG. The display control circuit 92 is controlled to display on the display 51. As a result, the main menu screen before password entry is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2203). Thereafter, the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is the specific effect mode (step S2202; YES), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the photoelectric sensor 57 (step S2204).

  When the detection signal is not input from the photoelectric sensor 57 (step S2204; NO), the process to be executed is returned to the calling process of this process. When a detection signal is input from the photoelectric sensor 57 (step S2204; YES), it is determined whether or not the input level of the detection signal is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (step S2205). That is, by determining whether or not the amount of reflected light received by the light receiving element 57b of the photoelectric sensor 57 is greater than or equal to a predetermined amount, it is determined whether or not the irradiation light of the light emitting element 57a is reflected by the portable terminal 1100. .

  If the input level of the detection signal is not equal to or higher than the predetermined value (step S2205; NO), the process to be executed is returned to the process of the caller of this process. When the input level of the detection signal is equal to or higher than the predetermined value (step S2205; YES), notification is made when a mobile terminal is detected indicating that the mobile terminal has been detected (step S2206).

  The notification is performed, for example, by displaying a message or an image from the liquid crystal display 51 (such as counting down the time until the main menu is displayed), outputting sound from the speakers 53 and 54, and the like.

  After the notification at the time of detecting the portable terminal, the sub CPU 91a performs display control to display the main menu screen after the password input (after selecting “Easy Start”) as shown in FIG. 13B on the liquid crystal display 51. The circuit 92 is controlled. Thereby, the main menu screen after the password is input is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2207). Thereafter, the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  Conventionally, it has been necessary to perform an operation for displaying a two-dimensional code after performing an operation for displaying a main menu screen. In this embodiment, however, the mobile terminal 1100 is automatically detected when detected. Since the main menu screen is displayed, it is possible to save the trouble of acquiring the two-dimensional code using the portable terminal 1100, and to eliminate the troublesome feeling of the player when acquiring the two-dimensional code.

  Further, since the mobile terminal 1100 is informed that the mobile terminal 1100 has been detected, the player can confirm that the mobile terminal has been detected, and can reliably acquire the two-dimensional code.

  Further, since the main menu screen is displayed when the mobile terminal 1100 is detected, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not to display the main menu screen.

  Note that the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that displays a main menu when a predetermined switch is operated after notification when a mobile terminal is detected.

  Further, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that displays a guideline (for example, a guideline or a small character) for bringing the mobile terminal 1100 close to a specific area from the liquid crystal display 51.

  In this embodiment, an example in which the main menu screen is automatically displayed when the mobile terminal 1100 is detected will be described. However, when the mobile terminal 1100 is detected, a two-dimensional code is automatically displayed directly. It is also possible to do.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main menu operation process before password input (the process of S4006 of the timer interrupt process (sub) shown in FIG. 23) executed in the slot machine 1. This process is started when a player performs a selection operation on any menu item on the main menu screen (see FIG. 13A) before entering the password (or before selecting “Easy Start”). .

  When the “stock coin hint” is selected by the player (step S2301; YES), the sub CPU 91a refers to the stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area and corresponds to the state of the accumulated coin. Then, any one of the hint screens shown in FIGS. 14A to 14D is selected and displayed (step S2302). However, as described above, when a predetermined time (for example, one hour) has not elapsed since the resetting of stock coin data, regardless of the value content of the stock coin data, (a) to ( One predetermined screen (for example, the screen shown in FIG. 14C) of the hint screens shown in d) is displayed. Thereby, the player can predict how much stock coins are accumulated in the slot machine 1. If the effect switch 56 is operated while the hint screen is displayed, the screen returns to the main menu screen. If the state where no operation is continued for a predetermined time during the display of the hint screen, the screen returns to the basic screen.

  Or, when “member registration” is selected by the player (step S2303; YES), the sub CPU 91a determines a URL indicating the location of the member registration page of the management server 1200 (FIG. 20A). Reference) is generated and displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2304). The player operates the mobile terminal 1100 to cause the displayed two-dimensional code to be captured and to be taken into the mobile terminal 1100 (store the two-dimensional code image in the storage unit 120 (see FIG. 2)). it can. If the effect switch 56 is operated during the display of the two-dimensional code or if no operation is continued for a predetermined time, the screen returns to the basic screen.

  Alternatively, if the “simple start” is selected by the player (step S2305; YES), the sub CPU 91a closes the main menu screen to display the basic screen on the liquid crystal display 51, and from the normal performance mode. The control state is changed to the specific effect mode (step S2306). In this case, the sub CPU 91a also sets a specific effect mode flag indicating that control has been performed in the specific effect mode. Further, the sub CPU 91a displays a character based on the default effect setting in the specific effect area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, and displays a level value and an experience value meter based on the default value in the specific effect area 51b ( For example, 0 for a level value, 0 level for an empirical value meter).

  Alternatively, if “password input” is selected by the player (step S2307; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes a password input acceptance process (step S2308).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the password input acceptance process. First, the sub CPU 91a controls the display control circuit 92 to display a password input screen on the liquid crystal display 51. Thereby, a password input screen (see FIG. 15B) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2401).

  The player operates the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 while viewing the password issued from the management server 1200, which is displayed on the display screen of the portable terminal 1100 (see FIG. 50F). Enter the password on the password entry screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the player performs a password determination operation on the password input screen (step S2402; YES), the sub CPU 91a performs the above-described process (see FIG. 17). ), The input password is analyzed (step S2403).

  As a result of the analysis, if the input password is not a regular password (step S2404; NO), the sub CPU 91a displays the above-described password NG screen (not shown) indicating that the password input has not been accepted, on the liquid crystal display. 51 is displayed (step S2405). During the display of the password NG screen, when the effect switch 56 is operated or a predetermined time elapses, the screen is switched to the basic screen.

  On the other hand, the input password is a regular password (step S2404; YES), but if the model information included in the password indicates a model different from the slot machine 1 (step S2406; YES), the sub The CPU 91a controls the liquid crystal display 51 to perform an effect of displaying that the model is different (step S2407). As a result, as shown in FIG. 27, an effect screen in which the character speaks that a password of a different model has been input is displayed in the specific effect area 51 a of the liquid crystal display 51.

  When the predetermined time elapses, the effect screen is switched to the basic screen in the normal effect mode (see FIG. 18A). That is, when a password of a different model is input, the input of the password is accepted, but the game cannot be started using the function of storing the game history without shifting to the specific effect mode.

  On the other hand, if it is not a different model (step S2406; NO), the sub CPU 91a displays a password OK screen (see FIG. 16C) on the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2408). When the password OK screen is displayed, the effect switch 56 is operated or when the predetermined time elapses, the screen is switched to the basic screen.

  When switching from the password OK screen to the basic screen, the sub CPU 91a sets a level, an effect setting, and the like based on the analysis result of the password (step S2409). The sub CPU 91a stores the input password in a password storage area assigned to the RAM 91b. Further, the sub CPU 91a changes the control state from the normal effect mode to the specific effect mode (step S2410). In this case, the sub CPU 91a also sets a specific effect mode flag indicating that control has been performed in the specific effect mode. Further, the sub CPU 91a also sets a password input flag indicating that the game is started after the password is input. It should be noted that the setting of the level and effect setting and the transition to the specific effect mode may be performed at the timing when the password OK screen is displayed.

  With the above settings, the level and production settings corresponding to the previous game history are taken over by the slot machine 1. Further, by shifting to the specific effect mode, the player can start a game using a function for accumulating a game history.

  Next, the sub CPU 91a checks a flag indicating whether or not one month or more has elapsed since the previous game, which is indicated by the third bit, in the latest information included in the password, and the flag is determined to be the previous game. It is determined whether or not the value is “1” indicating that one month or more has passed (step S2411).

  As a result, when it is indicated that one month or more has elapsed since the previous game (step S2411; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes an effect indicating that (step S2413). For example, since a game has not been played recently, an effect screen in which the character speaks that he wants to play a number of times is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51.

On the other hand, when it is not indicated that one month or more has elapsed since the previous game (step S2411; NO), the sub CPU 91a suggests the previous game according to the value of the flag derived by analyzing the password. An effect (previous game suggestion effect) is executed (step S2412). More specifically, the sub CPU 91a uses a flag value indicating whether or not the previous number of games is 700 games or less indicated by the first bit of the latest information included in the password, or the second bit. The previous game suggestion effect is executed according to the value of the flag indicating whether or not the previous BB count is 10 or more. For example, the sub CPU 91a executes an effect by displaying such as “The bonus number was 10 or more before this time. That ’s amazing.” Or “I did not rotate so much before and do my best today.” The liquid crystal display 51 is controlled.

  Returning to the pre-password input main menu operation process shown in FIG. 25, after the password input acceptance process is completed, the sub CPU 91a executes an effect setting process (S2309). In the effect setting process, the effect setting screen is displayed by switching from the main menu screen to the effect setting screen (not shown). The player sets any one of a plurality of types of effects displayed on the effect setting screen (for example, selects a character from a plurality of effects). The setting of the effect is performed, for example, by pressing the stop switch to make a selection, and pressing the effect switch 56 to determine the selected effect. When the effect switch 56 is pressed or no operation is continued for a predetermined time during the display of the effect setting screen, the screen returns to the basic screen.

  When “end” is selected by the player (step S2310; YES), the sub CPU 91a displays an end confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 13C on the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2311). Here, when an operation of selecting “YES” is performed by the player or when a predetermined time elapses, the screen is switched to the basic screen. Or if operation which selects "NO" is performed by the player, it will return to a main menu screen (refer Fig.13 (a)).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the level / coin related process (the process of S4007 of the timer interrupt process (sub) shown in FIG. 23) executed in the slot machine 1. This process is executed for each game of the game. First, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the current control state is the specific effect mode (step S2601). As a result, when it is determined that it is not the specific effect mode (step S2601; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2614. Whether or not it is the specific effect mode can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the specific effect mode flag is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode is the specific effect mode (step S2601; YES), that is, if the game is started by inputting a password or if “easy start” is selected and the game is started, The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not a predetermined achievement condition such as the condition shown in FIG. 11 is satisfied (step S2602). As a result, when the achievement condition is not satisfied (step S2602; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2607.

  On the other hand, when the achievement condition is satisfied (step S2602; YES), the sub CPU 91a updates the experience value and the history of the achievement mission according to the achievement condition (step S2603). The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the updated experience value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value corresponding to the level (in this embodiment, 10 experience values regardless of the level) (step S2604). As a result, when the experience value is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step S2604; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2607.

  On the other hand, when the experience value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step S2604; YES), the sub CPU 91a increases the level as much as possible (increases the level value) based on the experience value (step S2605). Then, the sub CPU 91a subtracts the value for the increased level from the experience value (step S2606). For example, when the level is increased by 2, 20 experience values (10 experience values × 2) are subtracted.

  In step S2607, the sub CPU 91a updates other game histories (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, etc.). Next, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the above-described coin acquisition conditions (see FIGS. 12A and 12B) are satisfied (step S2608). As a result, when the acquisition condition is not satisfied (step S2608; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2614.

  On the other hand, when the acquisition condition is satisfied (step S2608; YES), the sub CPU 91a checks whether or not the game is started by inputting the password (step S2608A). Note that whether or not the game is started when a password is input can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not a password input flag is set. If the password is input and the game is started, the sub CPU 91a selects a coin determination table for password input as a coin determination table for determining whether or not to acquire coins (step S2608B). On the other hand, if the game is not started when a password is input (that is, if “easy start” is selected), the sub CPU 91a uses a coin determination table for determining whether or not to acquire a coin. Then, a coin determination table for password non-input is selected (step S2608C).

  Then, the sub CPU 91a performs lottery processing based on random numbers using the coin determination table selected in steps S2608B and S2608C, and executes lottery processing according to the established condition (step S2609). In this case, if the game is started after the password is input, a coin is awarded according to the acquisition probability shown in FIG. 12A using the password determination coin selection table selected in step S2608B. Then it is decided. On the other hand, if the game is started with “Easy Start” selected, according to the acquisition probability shown in FIG. 12B, using the coin determination table for password non-input selected in step S2608C. It is decided to give a coin.

  As a result of the lottery process in step S2610, when the lottery is not won (step S2610; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process in step S2614. On the other hand, when the lottery is won (step S2610; YES), the sub CPU 91a updates the acquired data stored in the acquired coin area allocated to the RAM 91b according to the winning result (the type and number of coins) ( Step S2611).

  In addition, when the established acquisition condition is level high, medium mission achievement, and there is a stock coin (one type of coin is sufficient), as described above, additional coins are additionally given. The At that time, the sub CPU 91a subtracts the added coins from the stock coins. However, in the stock coin, if there are no additional coins of the same type as the added coins, the number of coins of that type in the stock coin is set to 0 (in the case of 0 originally, 0) It will remain as it is.)

  In step S2614, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not a stock condition (see FIG. 12C) for adding (stocking) stock coins is satisfied. As a result, when the stock condition is not satisfied (step S2614; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2616. On the other hand, when the stock condition is satisfied (step S2614; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes a lottery process (stock lottery process) for stocking coins (step S2615).

  In this embodiment, as described above, the stock lottery process is executed on condition that a bonus is won or 100 games are consumed (except for a game in a bonus state). In the example shown in FIG. 12C, the winning probability is set to 20% when 100 games are consumed, but the winning probability may be changed according to the current contents of stock coins. . For example, when the total number of coins in the stock coin is 15 or less, the winning probability may be higher than in the case of 16 or more.

  As a result of the stock lottery process, when the lottery is not won (step S2616; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2616. On the other hand, when the lottery is won (step S2616; YES), the sub CPU 91a updates the stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area allocated to the RAM 91b according to the winning result (the type and number of coins). (Step S2617).

  In step S2618, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 hours) has elapsed since the power to the slot machine 1 was turned on. As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the power was turned on (step S2616; NO), the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of the level coin related process.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on (step S2616; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes a lottery process (stock coin data reset lottery process) for resetting the stock coin data ( Step S2619). In this process, first, the stock coin storage area is cleared, and the value contents are different (that is, the combination of gold, silver, and copper is different). Determine coin data. The sub CPU 91a stores the determined stock coin data in the stock coin storage area (step S2620). Then, the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of the level / coin related process.

  In addition, you may comprise so that a gold coin acquisition may be alert | reported when a gold coin is acquired. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the procedure of the level / coin related process (the process of S4007 of the timer interrupt process (sub) shown in FIG. 23) when notifying the acquisition of gold coins. In the example shown in FIG. 29, after executing the process of step S2611, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not a gold coin has been acquired (step S2612). As a result, when the gold coin has not been acquired (S2612; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2614. On the other hand, when gold coins have been acquired (S2612; YES), notification that gold coins have been acquired is executed (step S2613). The notification is performed, for example, by displaying a message or an image indicating that gold coins have been acquired from the liquid crystal display 51, and outputting sound from the speakers 53 and 54.

  Specifically, as described in the item granting process of FIG. 47, when gold coins are acquired, items related to the effect mode set by the player and items desired by the player can be obtained. For this reason, when a notification that gold coins have been acquired is given, the player feels joy and is more motivated to play, so the operating rate of the slot machine 1 can be improved.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main menu operation processing after password entry executed in the slot machine 1. This process is started when a player performs an operation of selecting any menu item on the main menu screen (see FIG. 13B) after entering the password (or after selecting “Easy Start”). .

  When “today's result” is selected by the player (step S2701; YES), the sub CPU 91a indicates the contents of the player's game history and the like from the start of the game after the password input or simple start to the current time. A screen (not shown) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2702). Specifically, the sub CPU 91a, from the personal history storage area, experience value storage area, level storage area, earned coin storage area, etc. assigned to the RAM 91b, game history, achievement mission history, experience value, level, acquisition Get data etc. Then, a screen showing the acquired data contents is generated and displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Alternatively, when “DATA CLEAR” is selected by the player (step S2703; YES), the sub CPU 91a changes the control state from the specific effect mode to the normal effect mode (step S2704), and after the password is input or simple start The game history of the player from the start of the game to the current time is cleared (step S2705). Specifically, the sub CPU 91a assigns the password storage area, the personal history storage area, the experience value storage area, the anniversary storage area, the level storage area, the model information storage area, the latest information storage area, and the effect setting assigned to the RAM 91b. Clear each of the storage area and the acquired coin storage area.

  Alternatively, when the “two-dimensional code creation” is selected by the player (step S2706; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes a two-dimensional code display process (step S2707).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the two-dimensional code display process. First, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not a lottery condition (stock coin acquisition lottery condition) for acquiring stock coins is satisfied (step S2801). In this embodiment, 1000 games have been consumed after entering the password or after selecting “Easy Start” (except for games in the bonus state), and 3 or more gold coins have been stocked. If any of these conditions is satisfied, it is determined that the stock coin acquisition lottery condition is satisfied.

  As a result, when the stock coin acquisition lottery condition is not satisfied (step S2801; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2807. On the other hand, when the stock coin acquisition lottery condition is satisfied (step S2801; YES), the sub CPU 91a sets the stock acquisition lottery flag to ON (step S2802), and after inputting the password or selecting “easy start”, The medal difference number up to is calculated (step S2803). The medal difference number is obtained by subtracting the total number of medals inserted by the player from the total number of medals acquired by the player during the game period.

  After calculating the medal difference number, the sub CPU 91a executes a stock acquisition lottery process (step S2804). In this embodiment, in this lottery process, when the medal difference number is negative, the winning probability is higher than when it is positive.

  As a result of the stock acquisition lottery process, when the lottery is not won (step S2805; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2807. On the other hand, when the lottery is won (step S2805; YES), the sub CPU 91a updates the acquired data stored in the acquired coin area allocated to the RAM 91b according to the winning result (the type and number of coins) ( Step S2806). In this embodiment, when winning in the stock acquisition lottery process, all the stock coins can be acquired. Therefore, when the lottery is won, the sub CPU 91a updates the stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area so that the number of coins of gold, silver and copper becomes zero.

  In step S2807, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the game in the specific effect mode is due to the selection of “easy start”. As a result, when the game is a simple start game (step S2807; YES), the sub CPU 91a generates a two-dimensional code (see FIG. 20B) corresponding to the simple start game (step S2808).

  On the other hand, if the game is not a game with a simple start, that is, a game with a password input (step S2807; NO), the sub CPU 91a generates a two-dimensional code (see FIG. 20C) corresponding to the game with a password input. (Step S2809).

  If the stock lottery flag is ON (step S2810; YES), the sub CPU 91a turns off the stock acquisition lottery flag (step S2811). Further, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display the stock coin acquisition lottery effect screen and the generated two-dimensional code (step S2812). Specifically, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display a JACKPOT effect screen as shown in FIG. If the lottery is not won in the previous stock acquisition lottery process, the sub CPU 91a displays a JACKPOT effect screen indicating that the stock coin could not be acquired as shown in FIG. The generated two-dimensional code synthesized screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. On the other hand, when the lottery is won, the JACKPOT effect screen indicating that the stock coin has been acquired and the generated two-dimensional code composition screen as shown in FIG. To display.

  On the other hand, when the stock lottery flag is not ON (step S2810; NO), the sub CPU 91a causes the generated two-dimensional code to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in a normal manner without any effects as shown in FIG. 19B. (Step S2813).

  Regardless of whether or not there is an effect, if the effect switch 56 is operated during the display of the two-dimensional code or if no operation is continued for a predetermined time, the screen returns to the basic screen. At that time, the sub CPU 91a changes the control state from the specific effect mode to the normal effect mode (step S2814). Further, the sub CPU 91a clears the player's game history and the like after the password is input or after the game is started by simple start until the current time (step S2815). Specifically, the sub CPU 91a assigns the password storage area, the personal history storage area, the experience value storage area, the anniversary storage area, the level storage area, the model information storage area, the latest information storage area, and the effect setting assigned to the RAM 91b. Clear storage area and earned coin storage area.

  After the password input shown in FIG. 27, the process returns to the main menu operation process, and when “END” is selected by the player (step S2708; YES), the sub CPU 91a displays an end confirmation screen as shown in FIG. The data is displayed on the display 51 (step S2709). Here, when an operation of selecting “YES” is performed by the player or when a predetermined time elapses, the screen is switched to the basic screen. Alternatively, when an operation for selecting “NO” is performed by the player, the screen returns to the main menu screen (see FIG. 13B).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special effect execution process (the process of S4009 of the timer interrupt process (sub) shown in FIG. 23).

  In this process, first, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not a game is in progress (S4101). If the game is not in progress (S4101: NO), the process ends. When the game is in progress (S4101: YES), it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the photoelectric sensor 57 when a predetermined effect is generated (step S4102). As a predetermined effect, for example, the player is encouraged to perform an operation in front of the liquid crystal display 51 so that the photoelectric sensor 57 can detect (hold a hand or shake a hand). Display messages and images. If no detection signal is input from the photoelectric sensor 57 (step S4102; NO), the process ends. When a detection signal is input from the photoelectric sensor 57 (S4102; YES), it is determined whether or not the input level of the detection signal is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (S4103). That is, it is determined whether or not the player's action is detected by determining whether or not the amount of reflected light received by the light receiving element 57b of the photoelectric sensor 57 is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount.

  If the input level of the detection signal is equal to or higher than the predetermined value (S4103; YES), the process is terminated. When the input level of the detection signal is not equal to or higher than the predetermined value (S4103; NO), that is, when the amount of reflected light received by the light receiving element 57b does not reach the predetermined amount and the player's action is detected, otherwise Then, a special performance that is never executed is executed. The special effect is executed by, for example, displaying a premium character from the liquid crystal display 51, displaying a special message, or displaying a state of attacking an enemy character from the liquid crystal display 51. With special effects, for example, more advantageous AT such as transition to AT (Assist Time), which is a notification period for notifying specific information for specifying the operation mode of the stop button, raising the continuation rate of AT, and adding AT stock number Notification of granting of a state that is easy to shift to AT, permission of shifting to advantageous RT (replay time), and the like. Thus, the operation can be performed in the hope that the special effect is executed when the above-described predetermined effect occurs. When the special effect is executed, the process ends.

  Thus, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine 1 can be reduced by combining the detection by the photoelectric sensor 57 used for displaying the main menu screen with the detection for executing the special effect. Moreover, the interest of the production can be enhanced by executing the special production. Furthermore, the troublesomeness felt by the player when outputting the two-dimensional code can be eliminated.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the predetermined effect process (the process of S4010 of the timer interrupt process (sub) shown in FIG. 23). In the predetermined effect process, the sub CPU 91a checks whether or not a predetermined effect execution flag indicating that the predetermined effect is being executed is set (step S701).

  When the predetermined effect execution flag is set in step S701 (that is, when the predetermined effect is being executed), the sub CPU 91a sets the value of the predetermined effect timer for measuring the effect period of the predetermined effect. Is decremented by 1 (step S702). When the value of the predetermined effect timer becomes 0 (step S703), the predetermined effect is ended (step S704). Further, the sub CPU 91a resets the predetermined effect execution flag (step S705).

  If the predetermined effect execution flag is not set, the sub CPU 91a checks whether or not it is the game start timing (step S706). Note that whether or not it is the game start timing can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not a new reel rotation start command has been received. If it is not the game start timing, the process is terminated as it is.

  If it is time to start the game, the sub CPU 91a specifies whether or not the bonus is internally won (step S707). Note that whether or not the bonus has been internally won can be specified by confirming whether or not the bonus has been designated by the received internal winning command.

  Next, the sub CPU 91a checks whether or not there are earned coins (step S708). Whether or not there is an acquired coin can be specifically determined by confirming the acquired data updated in step S2611 of the level coin related process.

  If there is an acquired coin, the sub CPU 91a checks whether or not the game is started by inputting the password (step S709). Note that whether or not the game is started when a password is input can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not a password input flag is set.

  If the password is input and the game is started, is the sub CPU 91a set with a coin informed flag indicating that there is an acquired coin in a predetermined effect that has been executed previously? It is confirmed whether or not (step S709X). If the coin informed flag is not set (that is, if it is not informed that there is still an acquired coin), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the bonus in step S707 has been internally won, The predetermined effect determination table for coin notification is selected as the predetermined effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the predetermined effect (step S710).

  On the other hand, if there is no earned coin (N in step S708), if the game is not started after a password is entered (N in step S709), or if the coin notification flag is set (step S709) In step S709X (Y), the sub CPU 91a determines that there is no coin notification as a predetermined effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the predetermined effect according to the result of specifying whether or not the bonus in step S707 is internally won. A predetermined effect determination table is selected (step S711).

  Then, the sub CPU 91a performs lottery processing based on random numbers using the predetermined effect determination table selected in steps S710 and S711, and determines the presence and type of the predetermined effect (step S712).

  In step S712, the sub CPU 91a determines the presence / absence and type of a predetermined effect (which notification result is used), for example, using a predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG. FIG. 34 (A) shows a predetermined effect determination table for no coin notification. FIG. 34B shows a predetermined effect determination table for coin notification.

  In the predetermined effect determination table for no coin notification shown in FIG. 34 (A), the predetermined effect is not executed according to each of the case where the bonus is internally won and the case where the bonus is not internally won. A corresponding determination value, a determination value corresponding to executing the predetermined effect (×), and a determination value corresponding to executing the predetermined effect (◯) are set. In addition, in the predetermined effect determination table for coin notification shown in FIG. 34 (B), a determination value corresponding to executing a predetermined effect (coin) is also set. It should be noted that at least a determination value corresponding to executing the predetermined effect may be set in the predetermined effect determination table. FIG. 34 shows the number of determination values, not the determination value itself.

  The predetermined effect (×) is a predetermined effect for notifying that a bonus has not been won internally and that coins have not been acquired (hereinafter, also referred to as “outlier effect result”). Further, the predetermined effect (◯) is a predetermined effect for notifying that the bonus is internally won. The predetermined effect (coin) is a predetermined effect for notifying that a coin has been acquired. In this embodiment, when the predetermined effect (coin) is determined, the roulette is displayed with all the “O” and “X” options displayed as options (in this example, each roulette cell). A predetermined effect in a manner in which the sphere rotates is executed, and as a result of the effect, it appears that the sphere is temporarily stopped on the “x” option, and the “x” option is switched to the “coin” option. The effect of the aspect is executed.

  By executing the above processing, in this embodiment, when a password is input and a game is started, if there is an acquired coin, a predetermined effect determination table for coin notification is selected in step S710. As a result of the processing in step S712 being performed, a predetermined effect (coin) may be determined and it may be notified that there is an acquired coin in the predetermined effect. In this embodiment, even if the game is started by inputting a password, if there is no earned coin, a predetermined effect determination table for no coin notification is selected in step S711, and the process of step S712 is performed. Is executed, either the predetermined effect (◯) or the predetermined effect (×) is executed, and the predetermined effect (coin) is not executed. In this embodiment, even if there is an acquired coin, if “Easy Start” is selected and a game is started, a predetermined effect determination table for no coin notification is selected in Step S711, and Step S712 is performed. By executing the process, either the predetermined effect (◯) or the predetermined effect (×) is executed, and the predetermined effect (coin) is not executed. Furthermore, if the game is started without entering a password and selecting “Easy Start”, there is no case of acquiring coins, so it is always determined as N in step S708, and no coin notification is made in step S711. When the predetermined effect determination table for the image is selected and the process of step S712 is executed, either the predetermined effect (◯) or the predetermined effect (×) is executed, and the predetermined effect (coin) is executed. Absent.

  Next, the sub CPU 91a checks whether or not it has been decided to execute the predetermined effect in step S712 (step S713). If the predetermined effect is not executed, the process is terminated as it is. When it is determined to execute the predetermined effect, the sub CPU 91a selects effect data for executing the predetermined effect according to the type of the predetermined effect determined in step S712 (step S714).

  Next, the sub CPU 91a sets a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the determined pattern of the predetermined effect in the predetermined effect timer (step S715). Then, the sub CPU 91a starts a predetermined effect according to the effect data selected in step S714 (step S716) and sets a predetermined effect executing flag (step S717).

  If the predetermined effect (coin) is determined as the type of the predetermined effect (Y in step S718), the sub CPU 91a sets a coin notification flag (step S719). In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S709X, S718, and S719 is executed to notify that there is an acquired coin in a predetermined effect, the acquired coins are overlapped in a predetermined effect executed thereafter. It is preventing that there is that there is.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode of the predetermined effect. In the example shown in FIG. 35, a case where a predetermined effect (coin) is executed is shown as an example. When a new game is started and it is decided to execute a predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 35 (1), the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 has options “O” and “X” (FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 35, a roulette picture including “O” and “X” is displayed on each square of the roulette. Next, as shown in FIG. 35 (2), the predetermined effect is started by starting the effect of rotating the roulette ball together with the display suggesting the start of the predetermined effect such as “Roulette Chance!”. The

  Next, when it becomes the notification timing of the effect result, as shown in FIG. 35 (3), the effect that the ball once enters the square of “×” is executed, and the effect result of the predetermined effect is out of place. A production like that is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 35 (4), it is notified that there are earned coins by performing an effect that changes the square of the ball from “x” to “coin”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 35, the case where the predetermined effect (coin) is executed is shown. However, when the predetermined effect (◯) is executed, the “○” in FIG. An effect such as entering a ball is executed, and the ball is confirmed and displayed in a state where a ball enters the “○” square. In addition, when executing the predetermined effect (×), in FIG. 35 (3), an effect is entered such that the ball enters the “×” square, and the square of the entered “×” changes. Without confirmation, the display is confirmed with a ball in the “×” square.

  In this embodiment, when a predetermined effect (coin) is executed, as shown in FIG. 35, regardless of whether the type of earned coin is gold, silver, or copper, “ Although the case where “Coin” is displayed to notify that there is an acquired coin is shown, it is not limited to the notification mode shown in this embodiment. For example, by displaying “Gold Coin”, “Silver Coin”, “Copper Coin”, etc., or by changing the display color of “Coin”, the type of earned coin is either gold, silver or copper This may be reported in an identifiable manner. Also, for example, the number of acquired coins may be displayed in an identifiable manner by displaying a number together with “coin”.

  In this embodiment, once the processing of steps S709X, S718, and S719 is performed and it is once informed that there are coins acquired in a predetermined effect, the predetermined effect (coin) is executed in the predetermined effect executed thereafter. Is not selected, and it is prevented that there are duplicate earned coins, but it is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, even if it is informed once that there are earned coins in a predetermined effect, if a new earned coin is subsequently generated, it is notified that there are earned coins in a predetermined effect to be executed after that, You may comprise so that it can recognize that the acquired coin generate | occur | produced. In this case, for example, a number may be displayed together with the display of “coin”, and the increase in earned coins may be notified.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when the bonus is internally won, it may be determined that the predetermined effect (coin) is executed based on the presence of the acquired coins. It is notified that there are coins acquired in the predetermined effect in a manner as shown in 35 (in other words, the fact that the bonus is won internally is not notified in the predetermined effect), You may comprise so that notification of both having won internally and having an acquisition coin is possible. In this case, for example, in the predetermined effect in the roulette mode as shown in FIG. 35, the effect that the player enters the ball in the square of “○” is informed that the bonus is internally won, and the ball It is also possible to notify that there is an earned coin in such a manner that the sphere that has entered the ball changes from “◯” to “coin” or “coin” is displayed together with “◯”.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, a case where a predetermined effect is started by displaying a roulette picture including only the choices “O” and “X” is shown. You may comprise so that a predetermined effect may be started by displaying the picture of a roulette in a mode including options from the beginning. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38, a modified example in which a predetermined effect is started by displaying a roulette picture in a manner including the option of “coin” from the beginning will be described.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a modification of the predetermined effect process (the process of S4010 of the timer interrupt process (sub) shown in FIG. 23). 36, the processes in steps S701 to S708 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, the process of step S709 shown in FIG. 33 is not performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 36, when the sub CPU 91a determines that there is an acquired coin in step S708, the sub CPU 91a proceeds to step S709X to determine whether or not a coin notification flag is set (step S709X). If the informed flag is not set, the predetermined effect determination table for coin notification is selected as the predetermined effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the predetermined effect (step S710). On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91a determines that there is no acquired coin in step S708, or if it is determined in step S709X that the coin notification flag is set, the sub CPU 91a proceeds to step S711 to determine the presence and type of the predetermined effect. As the predetermined effect determination table, a predetermined effect determination table for no coin notification is selected (step S711).

  Note that the processes in steps S712 to S713 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  Next, when the sub CPU 91a determines that it is determined to execute the predetermined effect in step S713, the sub CPU 91a checks whether or not the specific effect mode is controlled (step S714A). Note that whether or not the specific effect mode is controlled can be determined by confirming whether or not the specific effect mode flag is set.

  If it is not controlled to the specific effect mode (N in Step S714A), it is not the case where the game is started by inputting the password, nor is the case where the game is started by selecting “Easy Start”. In this case, since the coin cannot be acquired, the sub CPU 91a includes only “O” and “X” as options according to the type of the predetermined effect determined in step S712 (the option of “coin” is selected). The effect data for no coins for displaying the roulette picture (not included) and starting the predetermined effect is selected (step S714B).

  If it is controlled to the specific effect mode, the sub CPU 91a checks whether or not it is a case where a password is input and a game is started (step S714C). Note that whether or not the game is started when a password is input can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not a password input flag is set.

  If the game is not started when the password is input (that is, if the game is started by selecting “Easy Start”), the sub CPU 91a sets the predetermined effect type determined in step S712. In response, the roulette picture including the “coin” option in addition to the “o” or “x” option is displayed to select effect data for small coins for starting a predetermined effect (step S714D).

  On the other hand, if the game is started after the password is input, the sub CPU 91a selects “COIN” in addition to the “O” and “X” options according to the type of the predetermined effect determined in step S712. A coin-rich effect data for displaying a roulette picture including options and starting a predetermined effect is selected (step S714E).

  In the modified examples shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, when the game is started by inputting the password, more “simple start” is selected than when the game is started. The roulette picture including the “coin” option is displayed and the predetermined effect is started. Therefore, in step S714D, the effect data for a small number of coins with few “coin” options is selected, and in step S714E, the effect data for many coins with many “coin” options is selected.

  Note that the processes in steps S715 to S719 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 are explanatory diagrams illustrating modifications of the effect mode of the predetermined effect. Among these, FIG. 37 shows an effect mode of a predetermined effect when a game is started by selecting “Easy Start”. Further, FIG. 38 shows an effect mode of a predetermined effect when a password is input and a game is started. In the example shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, a case where a predetermined effect (coin) is executed is shown as an example.

  When a new game is started and it is decided to execute a predetermined effect, as shown in FIGS. 37 (1) and 38 (1), “○” and “ In addition to the “x” option (in the example shown in FIG. 35, “O” and “x” are displayed on each square of the roulette), in addition to the “coin” option (in the example shown in FIG. 35, each roulette A roulette picture containing “coin” is displayed on the screen. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37 (1), when “easy start” is selected and the game is started, there are only two options of “coin”, whereas in FIG. 38 (1). As shown in the figure, when the game is started with the password entered, four “coin” options are included, and when the game is started with the password entered, more “coin” options are included. A predetermined effect is started in a manner.

  It should be noted that the manner of rendering differs between the case where the game is started by selecting “Easy Start” and the case where the game is started after the password is entered, as shown in FIGS. 36 to 38. For example, when “easy start” is selected and the game is started, there is only one option of “coin”, whereas when a game is started after a password is input, “ By including three “coin” choices, it may be possible to include more “coin” choices when the password is entered and the game is started. Various settings are possible.

  Also, for example, when a game is started after a password is input, a predetermined effect is started in a mode including an option of “coin”, and when a game is started by selecting “Easy Start”. The predetermined effect may be started in a mode including only “o” and “x” options.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 37 (2) and FIG. 38 (2), an effect that the sphere rotates around the roulette is started together with a display that suggests the start of a predetermined effect such as “Roulette Chance!”. The predetermined effect is started.

  Next, when it becomes the notification timing of the effect result, as shown in FIGS. 37 (3) and 38 (3), an effect is performed in which the ball enters the “coin” square, and FIG. 37 (4). As shown in FIG. 38 (4), the ball is confirmed and displayed while it is in the “coin” area, thereby informing that there is an acquired coin.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the case where the predetermined effect (coin) is executed is shown. However, when the predetermined effect (◯) is executed, FIGS. 37 (3) and 38 (3) are executed. ), An effect is made such that the ball enters the first square of “O”, and the final display is performed with the ball in the first square of “O”. In addition, when the predetermined effect (×) is executed, the effect of entering the square of “×” in FIG. 37 (3) and FIG. 38 (3) is executed, and “X” is given as it is. Confirmed display with a ball in the eye.

  Also, even if “Easy Start” is selected and the game is started, or if the game is not started after the password is input, there is no case where coins are acquired, so the selection is made in step S714B. The effect is executed according to the effect data without coins, the predetermined effect is started in a mode including only the choices of “◯” and “×”, and the result of “○” or “×” is notified. .

  Next, the contents of each process executed by the management server 1200 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of server main processing executed by the management server 1200. This server main process is executed whenever there is an access request from the mobile terminal 1100 to each web page managed by the management server 1200. In response to this access request, the control unit 210 of the management server 1200 executes the following processes.

  When there is a request for access to the web page for member registration from the portable terminal 1100 (step S2901; YES), the control unit 210 executes member registration processing (step S2902).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of this member registration processing, and FIG. 51 is a diagram showing data exchange between the portable terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 regarding this processing. The control unit 210 determines whether or not the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the portable terminal 1100 that has transmitted the member registration request is already registered in the player database (step S3001). When the terminal identification information is already registered in the player database (step S3001; YES), the control unit 210 transmits member information (for example, a player name (registered name) transmitted from the portable terminal 1100 in response to the player's operation. ), Personal information such as sex, date of birth, prefecture, etc.) is reflected in the player information corresponding to the terminal identification information (step S3002). Thus, for example, if the player has been updated at a simple start described later, but has not yet registered the member information, only the member information can be added or registered. Member information can be changed.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information has not been registered in the player database (step S3001; NO), the control unit 210 newly registers the player information corresponding to the player (the terminal identification information) in the player database ( Step S3003). In the player information in this case, only the terminal identification information and member information transmitted from the portable terminal 1100 according to the player's operation are stored. Then, the control unit 210 notifies the registration result to the portable terminal 1100 that has made the member registration request (step S3004). Upon receiving the registration result, the portable terminal 1100 displays the registration result and notifies the player to that effect.

  Returning to the server main process shown in FIG. 39, when there is a request for access to the web page for easy start update from the portable terminal 1100 (step S2903; YES), the control unit 210 executes the easy start update process ( Step S2904).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of this simple start update process, and FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the exchange of data between the slot machine 1 and the portable terminal 1100 and between the portable terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 regarding this process. is there. The control unit 210 determines whether or not the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the portable terminal 1100 that is the transmission source of the simple start update request is already registered in the player database (step S3101). When the terminal identification information is not already registered in the player database (step S3101; NO), the control unit 210 newly registers game result information corresponding to the player (the terminal identification information) in the player database (step S3101; NO). S3102). Then, the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S3104.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information has already been registered in the player database (step S3101; YES), the control unit 210 determines that the same game random number specified from the update request is the terminal identification information in the game history database. It is determined whether it is stored in the game history information corresponding to (step S3103). As a result, if the same game random number is stored in the game history information (step S3103; YES), it is very likely that the update request is the same two-dimensional code used for the previous update request. The control unit 210 transmits information indicating that the game history cannot be updated to the mobile terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information (step S3110). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when the same game random number is not stored in the game history information (step S3103; NO), the control unit 210 determines the player based on the game history update data, acquired data, etc. received from the mobile terminal 1100. The contents of the player information corresponding to the player in the database are updated, and the game history information is additionally registered in the game history database (step S3104). Also, the status of the player information is updated during standby. In the player information updating process here, the level and the experience value are not updated, but are updated by the level / experience value updating process described below.

  Next, the control unit 210 executes level / experience value update processing (step S3105). FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the level / experience value update process.

  The control unit 210 updates the level included in the player information corresponding to the player (terminal identification information) to the level included in the received game history update data (step S3301). Further, the control unit 210 adds the experience value included in the received game history update data to the experience value included in the player information (step S3302). As a result of this addition, control unit 210 determines whether or not the experience value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value corresponding to the level (in this embodiment, 10 experience values regardless of the level) (step S3303). As a result, when the experience value is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step S3303; NO), the control unit 210 advances the process to be performed to the process of step S3306.

  On the other hand, when the experience value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step S3303; YES), the control unit 210 increases the level by one (increases the level value by one) (step S3304). Then, the control unit 210 subtracts a value corresponding to one level up (here, 10 experience values) from the experience value (step S3305). As described above, the level and the experience value included in the player information are updated.

  In step S3306, the control unit 210 executes a lottery process for giving points. As with the earned coins, the points are exchange values when receiving a privilege. When the lottery process is not won (step S3307; NO), the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of calling this process.

  On the other hand, when winning (step S3307; YES), the control unit 210 determines whether or not the points (details will be described later) included in the player information corresponding to the player are 1000 points or more. (Step S3308).

  As a result, when the score is not 1000 points or more (step S3308; NO), the control unit 210 uses the player information corresponding to the player as a point corresponding to the total number of games included in the received game history update data. (Step S3309). For example, 1/10 of the total number of games is added. In this case, if the total number of games is 1000, 1000 × 1/10 = 100 points are added. Then, the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S3311.

  On the other hand, when the score is 1000 points or more (step S3308; YES), the control unit 210 corresponds to the player twice the number of points according to the total number of games included in the received game history update data. It adds to the point contained in player information (step S3310). For example, 2 times of 1/10 of the total number of games is added. In this case, if the total number of games is 1000 games, 1000 × 1/10 × 2 = 200 points are added.

  The control unit 210 clears the points included in the player information corresponding to the player (step S3311). Then, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  Returning to the simple start update process shown in FIG. 41, in step S3106, the control unit 210 transmits to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information that the update of the game history is completed (step S3106). Next, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the simple start update request from the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information has been transmitted five times or more in total (step S3107).

  As a result, when it has not been transmitted five times or more (step S3107; NO), the control unit 210 advances the process to be performed to the process of step S3109. On the other hand, if it has been transmitted five times or more (step S3107; YES), the control unit 210 receives a password issuance and recommends that a password be recommended to be played in the mobile phone indicated by the terminal identification information. It transmits to the terminal 1100 (step S3108).

  In step S3109, control unit 210 executes history display processing. The history display process is a process for displaying the player's game history on the portable terminal 1100 based on the player information corresponding to the player. Thereby, the display unit 140 of the mobile terminal 1100 displays, for example, the current number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, and the number of games accumulated so far, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, and the like. In the history display process, a digest of the current game may be displayed.

  Returning to the server main process shown in FIG. 39, when there is a request for access to the normal update web page from the mobile terminal 1100 (step S2905; YES), the control unit 210 executes the normal update process (step S2906). ).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of this normal update processing, and FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the exchange of data between the slot machine 1 and the portable terminal 1100 and between the portable terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 regarding this processing. . The control unit 210 determines whether or not the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the mobile terminal 1100 that is the transmission source of the normal update request is already registered in the player database (step S3201). When the terminal identification information is not registered in the player database (step S3201; NO), the control unit 210 transmits to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information that the game history or the like cannot be updated. (Step S3209). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information has been registered in the player database (step S3201; YES), the control unit 210 performs a game corresponding to the password specified from the update request and the terminal identification information in the player database. It is determined whether or not the password stored in the person information matches (step S3202). As a result, when the passwords match (step S3202; YES), the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S3204.

  On the other hand, if the passwords do not match (step S3202; NO), the control unit 210 determines whether there is a mismatch of only one character and the difference between the front and rear characters on the array when the password is input (step S3202). S3203). The difference between the front and rear characters on the layout at the time of password input is the front and rear characters of the password input screen shown in FIG. 15B. For example, if one character included in the regular password is “Z”, “Y” and “=” correspond to one character before and after that.

  As a result, when there is no mismatch of two or more characters or there is no difference between the front and rear characters (step S3203; NO), the control unit 210 indicates that the game history or the like cannot be updated by the mobile terminal indicated by the terminal identification information It transmits to 1100 (step S3209).

  On the other hand, if only one character does not match and there is a difference of one character before and after (step S3203; YES), it is authenticated as a player who has been issued a password, assuming that an input error condition is satisfied, and the control unit 210 Advances the process to be executed to the process of step S3204.

  In step S3204, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the same password or game random number specified from the update request is stored in the game history information corresponding to the terminal identification information in the game history database. As a result, when the same password or game random number is stored in the game history information (step S3204; YES), it is very likely that the update request is the same two-dimensional code used for the previous update request. Since it is high, the control unit 210 transmits information indicating that the game history or the like cannot be updated to the mobile terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information (step S3209).

  On the other hand, when neither the same password nor the game random number is stored in the game result information (step S3204; NO), the control unit 210 is based on the game history update data, acquired data, etc. received from the mobile terminal 1100. Then, the content of the player information corresponding to the player in the player database is updated, and the game history information is additionally registered in the game history database (step S3205). Also, the status of the player information is updated during standby. In the player information update process here, the level and experience value are not updated, but are updated in the following level / experience value update process.

  Next, the control unit 210 executes level / experience value update processing (step S3206). The contents of the level / experience value update processing are as described above (see FIG. 43).

  The control unit 210 transmits to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information that the game history has been updated (step S3207). Then, the control unit 210 executes history display processing (step 3208). The contents of the history display process are the same as the process of step S3109 in FIG.

  In the above normal update process, in the update of the player information when the password is a mismatch of only one character and is different by one character before and after (step S3203; YES), the received game history update data, Rather than updating all applicable items based on the acquired data, etc., among them, the total number of games, total number of BBs, total number of RBs, achievement missions that can appear at the level stored in the player information Only items that do not affect the continuity of the game history, such as the type of game, are updated, and this affects the continuity of the game history, such as the level, production settings, and types of achievement missions that do not appear at the level stored in the player information. The items and earned coins may not be updated. At that time, in the notification of update completion, the password was not completely matched but was in the range of input error, so only some items that did not affect continuity were updated. You may make it notify. In this way, the player has made a mistake in entering the password, but can recognize that the game history has been updated successfully, and identify the cause of any game history that has not been updated. It becomes possible.

  In addition, the input error condition is an arbitrary design item, and both the password registered in the management server 1200 and the password included in the update request are similar, and it is estimated that there is a high possibility of an input error. Anything can be used. For example, it may be determined that the input error condition is satisfied only when both passwords are different by only one character, and the input error condition is satisfied if there is a difference of one character before and after two characters. It may be determined that Also, if the characters that are different in both passwords are likely to be misunderstood, such as “O” and “0”, or those that are presumed to be highly similar, such as the difference between uppercase and lowercase letters, input You may determine with satisfy | filling the conditions of a mistake.

  Returning to the server main process shown in FIG. 39, when there is a request for access to the web page for the menu screen from the portable terminal 1100, that is, when there is a menu data acquisition request (step S2907; YES), the controller 210 Determines whether the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the portable terminal 1100 that is the transmission source of the request is already registered in the player database (step S2908). As a result, when the terminal identification information is not already registered in the player database (step S2908; NO), the control unit 210 informs the mobile terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information that the menu data cannot be acquired. Transmit (step S2911). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information is already registered in the player database (step S2908; YES), the control unit 210 transmits the menu data to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information (step S2909). As a result, a menu screen as shown in FIG. 50D is displayed on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100. On this menu screen, a menu of items that can be provided to the player at the site managed by the management server 1200 is displayed. Specifically, password issuance, history display, achievement mission display, earned coin count display, custom settings, game execution, avatar settings, shop contents purchase, bulletin board browsing and posting, etc. Each link is displayed. When a desired link is selected by the player, control unit 210 executes a menu selection receiving process (step S2910).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the menu selection acceptance process. When the player selects a password issuance link (step S3401; YES), the controller 210 executes a password issuance process (step S3402).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the password issuing process. The control unit 210 determines whether or not the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the portable terminal 1100 that is the transmission source of the request is already registered in the player database (step S3501). As a result, when the terminal identification information has not been registered in the player database (step S3501; NO), the control unit 210 transmits information that the password cannot be issued to the mobile terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information. (Step S3502). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information has already been registered in the player database (step S3501; YES), the control unit 210 determines the level, model information, and the like based on the player information and game history information corresponding to the player. Acquire information such as the latest information, anniversary, and other performance settings, and generate a password according to the procedure reverse to the procedure described with reference to FIG. The generated password is transmitted to portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information (step S3503).

  The control unit 210 stores the generated password in the player information corresponding to the player as the previously issued password, and updates the status during the game (step S3504). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  FIG. 50F is a diagram illustrating an example of a password display screen displayed on the display unit 140 of the mobile terminal 1100 when the password issuance link is selected. The player can input a password to the slot machine 1 while looking at the password display screen.

  In the management server 1200 of this embodiment, when a password issuance request is accepted, even if the status of the corresponding player information is in game, the issuance of password is not prohibited. Even when a new password issuance request is received, a new password is issued. Therefore, even if a password is issued but no game is played, a game is played but a 2D code is not acquired, or a 2D code is acquired but no update request is made A new password can be issued without access to release the password.

  Returning to the menu selection receiving process shown in FIG. 44, when the player selects a link for the number of acquired coins (step S3403; YES), the control unit 210 has player information corresponding to the player in the player database. , The number of gold, silver, and copper coins currently acquired by the player is acquired, and screen data indicating the result is transmitted to the portable terminal 1100 (step S3404). As a result, a screen showing the contents of the currently acquired coin as shown in FIG. 50H is displayed on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100.

  Alternatively, when the game execution link is selected by the player (step S3405; YES), the control unit 210 executes a game providing process (step S3406).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game providing process. The control unit 210 transmits a game application (in this embodiment, a slot machine game) to the mobile terminal 1100 (step S3601). Thereby, the player can execute a slot machine game as shown in FIG. 50I on the portable terminal 1100. In this slot machine game, the same symbol is aligned in the horizontal direction or the diagonal direction, so that the points are increased according to the symbol. In addition, when the execution of the game application is ended by the player, the score acquired by the player is transmitted to the management server 1200 as the execution result.

  When the game application execution result, i.e., the score is not received (step S <b> 3602; NO), the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the calling process of this process. On the other hand, when a score is received (step S3602; YES), the control unit 210 updates and registers the received score in the player information corresponding to the player in the player database.

  Further, the control unit 210 adds coins (gold, silver, bronze) corresponding to the received points to the acquired coins included in the player information (step S3604).

  Further, the control unit 210 adds a point corresponding to the received score to the point included in the player information (step S3605). Then, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  Returning to the menu selection acceptance process shown in FIG. 44, when a shop link is selected by the player (step S3407; YES), the control unit 210 executes an item assignment process (step S3408).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the item assigning process, and FIG. 54 is a diagram showing data exchange between the portable terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 regarding this process. The control unit 210 determines whether or not the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the mobile terminal 1100 is already registered in the player database (step S3701). As a result, when the terminal identification information is not already registered in the player database (step S3701; NO), the control unit 210 transmits to the portable terminal 1100 that item assignment is impossible (step S3702). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information is already registered in the player database (step S3701; YES), the control unit 210 extracts the acquired coins from the player information corresponding to the player in the player database, and the player It is determined whether or not has acquired silver coins or copper coins (step S3703).

  If a silver coin or a copper coin has been acquired (step S3703; YES), it is determined whether or not an effect has been set in the effect setting process shown in S2309 of FIG. 25 (step S3704). If the effect has been set (step S3704; YES), the process proceeds to S3707. When the production has not been set (step S3704; NO), the number of games is extracted from the player database, and it is determined whether or not the number of games is 1000 games or more (step S3705).

  If the number of games is not 1000 or more (step S3705; NO), the lottery table E (see FIG. 48E) is selected as the lottery table used in the item acquisition lottery (step S3712). If the number of games is 1000 or more (step S3705; YES), an item setting process is executed (step S3706).

  In the item setting process, an item list indicating a plurality of types of items (for example, item A or item B) is transmitted to the mobile terminal 1100. A screen showing the items that can be given is displayed on the display unit 140 of the mobile terminal 1100 that has made the item request. When the player sets a link corresponding to a desired item type, data indicating the selected item type is transmitted to the management server 1200. When receiving the item type desired by the player from the portable terminal 1100, the control unit 210 stores the received item type in the privilege database.

  When the item setting process ends, the control unit 210 determines whether the number of games is 5000 or more (step S3707). Then, the lottery tables A to D (see (A) to (D) shown in FIG. 48) are selected as the lottery tables used in the item acquisition lottery from the determination result and the setting contents of the production or the item setting contents. (Step S3708). When the selection of the lottery table is performed, an item acquisition lottery process for determining an item to be given to the player is executed (step S3709). When the item acquisition lottery process is completed, the item data of the item type determined in the item acquisition lottery executed in the process is read from the storage location indicated by the privilege database, and the item is extracted (step S3710) and transmitted to the portable terminal 1100. (Step S3711).

  Here, the lottery tables A to E used in the item acquisition lottery will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 48A, in the lottery table A, the grant probability of the item A is set to 60%, and the grant probability of the item B is set to 40%. The lottery table A is used in the item acquisition lottery when the item A is related to the set effect or when the item A is set in the item setting process and the number of games is 5000 or more.

  As shown in FIG. 48B, in the lottery table B, the grant probability of the item A is set to 80%, and the grant probability of the item B is set to 20%. The lottery table B is used in the item acquisition lottery when the item A is related to the set effect or when the item A is set in the item setting process and the number of games is 5000 games or less.

  As shown in FIG. 48C, in the lottery table C, the grant probability of the item A is set to 40%, and the grant probability of the item B is set to 60%. The lottery table C is used in the item acquisition lottery when the item B is related to the set effect or when the item B is set in the item setting process and when the number of games is 5000 games or more.

  As shown in FIG. 48D, in the lottery table D, the grant probability of the item A is set to 20%, and the grant probability of the item B is set to 80%. The lottery table D is used in the item acquisition lottery when the item B is related to the set effect or when the item B is set in the item setting process and the number of games is less than 5000 games.

  As shown in FIG. 48E, in the lottery table E, the grant probability of the item A is set to 50%, and the grant probability of the item B is set to 50%. The lottery table E is used in the item acquisition lottery when the production is not set and the number of games is 1000 games or less.

  Thus, in the lottery tables A to D, when the production is set, the provision probability of the item related to the set production is higher than when the production is not set, and the number of games exceeds 1000 games. If the number of games is 1000 or less, the item grant probability is set so that the item grant probability set by the player is higher. In addition, in the lottery tables A to D, when the number of games exceeds 5000 games, the item grant probability is changed.

  Returning to the item granting process shown in FIG. 47, if no silver coin or copper coin has been acquired (step S3703; NO), it is determined whether or not a gold coin has been acquired (step S3710). If gold coins have not been acquired, that is, if no gold, silver, or copper coins have been acquired as a result (step S3713; NO), the process ends. If gold coins have been acquired (step S3713; YES), it is determined whether or not an effect has been set in the effect setting process shown in S2309 of FIG. 25 (step S3714).

  If the effect has been set (step S3714; YES), the process proceeds to S3716. If the effect has not been set (step S3714; NO), an item setting process is executed (step S3715). In the item setting process, the same process as step S3706 is performed. Thereafter, the item type is specified from the setting contents of the production or the setting contents of the item, the item data of the specified item type is read from the storage location indicated by the privilege database, and the item is extracted (step S3716). Transmit (step S3711). Thereby, the player can acquire data such as a two-dimensional code indicating the content data.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the slot machine 1 gives a privilege (in this example, gold, silver, and copper coins) different from the advantageous gaming state (in this example, a bonus). . In addition, game-related information related to the game (in this example, the total number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, the game history such as earned coins, etc.) is stored in an identifiable manner, and information that can specify the game-related information is output (In this example, a two-dimensional code is displayed). Also, based on the player's operation, settings are made to output information that can identify game-related information (in this example, password input), and settings are made to output game-related information. Sometimes, a privilege is advantageously given compared to when no setting for outputting game-related information is made. Then, an advantage possibility suggestion result (in this example, a result of “○” or “x”) or a privilege that suggests that a privilege has been given, which suggests whether or not the advantageous gaming state is controlled as an effect result. An indication effect (in this example, an effect result of “coin” in this example) is notified after an effect in a common aspect (in this example, an aspect in which the sphere rotates a roulette) , Predetermined effect). Therefore, if the setting for outputting game-related information is performed, the rate at which it is notified that the privilege is advantageously given and the privilege is given by the suggestion effect increases, so the game-related information is output. It is possible to improve the interest related to the provision of a privilege for a player who is making a setting to do.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the slot machine 1 gives a predetermined exchange value (in this example, gold, silver, and copper coins) as a privilege. Then, the management server 1200 gives a predetermined advantageous value (in this example, an item) by consuming the predetermined exchange value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest related to the provision of a predetermined exchange value as a privilege for a player who has made settings for outputting game-related information.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the slot machine 1 has an advantageous game suggestion result (in this example, an indication of “◯”) that suggests that the slot machine 1 is controlled in the advantageous game state as an advantageous possibility suggestion result. Result) or a non-advantageous game suggestion result (in this example, “x” effect result) suggesting that the game state is not controlled. In addition, when the setting for outputting game-related information is performed, in the suggestion effect, a plurality of option display effects corresponding to each effect result are displayed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, After displaying the roulette picture including the choices of “○” and “×” and starting the execution of a roulette ball rotation), the non-advantageous game suggestion result is switched to the bonus grant suggestion and notified. It is possible (in this example, once it is shown that the result of “X” is produced as shown in FIG. 35 (3), then “coin” is obtained from the result of “X” as shown in FIG. 35 (4). ”To the production result). For this reason, by providing an unexpectedness to the notification mode of the suggestion effect, it is possible to further improve the interest related to the provision of the privilege for the player who is performing the setting for outputting the game related information.

  In this embodiment, if the slot machine 1 is configured to output game-related information when configured as in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, Execution of option display effects by replacing the option display corresponding to the non-advantageous game suggestion result displayed when the setting for outputting game-related information has not been made with the option display corresponding to the bonus grant suggestion result (In this example, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, when a game is started by entering a password, compared to the case where a game is started by selecting “Easy Start” After the effect that the ball rotates the roulette in a manner that includes more “coins” options), it is possible to notify the privilege grant suggestion result. For this reason, by providing an unexpectedness to the notification mode of the suggestion effect, it is possible to further improve the interest related to the provision of the privilege for the player who is performing the setting for outputting the game related information.

  In this embodiment, in the suggestion effect (in this example, a predetermined effect), a case is shown in which whether or not a bonus is internally won as an advantageous game state is shown. The state is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, you may comprise so that it can alert | report in the suggestion effect | action that it shifted to AT (assist time), RT (replay time), and ART as an advantageous game state. Further, for example, it may be configured so that it can be notified in the suggestion effect that a small role or a replaying role is won.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the coin of gold | metal | money, silver, and copper was awarded as a privilege was shown, the information provided as a privilege is not restricted to what was shown in this embodiment. For example, the experience value as shown in this embodiment is regarded as a privilege, and when the password is entered and the game is started, the experience value is advantageously given compared to the case where it is not May be.

  Further, in this embodiment, the slot machine 1 side performs a process of granting a privilege (in this example, gold, silver, and copper coins), and the management server 1200 side performs a predetermined advantageous value (this book) In the example, a case is shown in which the process of granting an item) is performed. However, for example, the process of granting a privilege is unnecessary, and the slot machine 1 side performs a process of giving a predetermined advantageous value. It may be configured. In this case, the slot machine 1 performs a process of determining whether or not to give a predetermined advantageous value (for example, an item such as an image), and displays the determined item such as an image on the liquid crystal display 51. That's fine. Further, for example, the slot machine 1 may be configured to display a two-dimensional code including a determination result as to whether or not to add an item such as an image, instead of directly displaying an item such as an image. Then, when the player uses the mobile terminal 1100 to photograph the two-dimensional code and access the Web server, the determined item such as an image may be downloaded to the mobile terminal 1100. The slot machine 1 configured as described above may be configured such that when a password is input and a game is started, a predetermined advantageous value is advantageously given as compared to the case where the password is not input.

  In this embodiment, as an example of an operation for inputting a password as a setting for outputting information capable of specifying game-related information, the operation is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. For example, in addition to an operation of inputting a password, an operation of selecting “easy start” may be regarded as a setting for outputting information that can specify game-related information. In this case, for example, even if neither password input nor “easy start” selection operation is performed, a privilege is given at a small rate, and password input operation or “easy start” When the selection operation is performed, a privilege may be advantageously given as compared with a case where the selection operation is not performed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the effect that a sphere rotates a roulette was shown as a suggestion effect (in this example, a predetermined effect), the effect mode of the suggestion effect is in this embodiment. It is not limited to what is shown. For example, even in the same roulette effect, an effect in which the roulette performs a rotation operation may be executed. In addition, for example, an effect such that a dice rotates may be performed as a suggestion effect, and an effect result may be notified depending on which of the dice stops. Further, for example, an effect such that the effect of rotating the film is performed as the suggestion effect, and the effect result is notified depending on which frame on the film stops may be executed.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when an effect is set, the probability that an item of a type related to the set effect is given is higher than when an effect is not set. The item that the player likes can be given, and the player can feel the joy of giving the item. Moreover, since the willingness to set a production and play a game can be raised, the operating rate of the slot machine 1 can be improved.

  In addition, when the number of games played by the player is 1000 games or more, the probability that the item set by the player, that is, the item desired by the player, is higher than when the number of games is 1000 games or less. It is possible to increase the player's willingness to play a game and improve the operating rate of the slot machine 1.

  In addition, when a gold coin is acquired, an item related to the effect set by the player or an item set by the player is given, and when the gold coin is acquired, the fact is notified. It is possible to identify that an item that the user likes is given. Thereby, a player's willingness to play a game again can be heightened and the operation rate of the slot machine 1 can be improved.

  Moreover, since the probability of giving an item is changed when the number of games is 5000 or more, the interest of the game can be improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 91a increases the items that can be selected as the effect setting every time the level value exceeds a certain value. More specifically, the frequency of production (production setting 1), main character (production setting 2), character costume (production setting 3), production background design (production setting 4), BGM ( The production setting 5) can be selected, and in these production settings, it is possible to select from 3 types until the level exceeds 30, and when the level exceeds 30, it becomes possible to select from 5 types and exceeds the level 60 And 8 types can be selected. And in the item grant process shown in FIG. 47, the example which gives either item A or item B was given and demonstrated, but when an item increases according to a level like this embodiment, it is set. The item (ie, item) related to the performance is determined and assigned by item acquisition lottery, or the player sets one of the items (ie, items) The present invention can be implemented by giving the item set when winning by the acquisition lottery.

[Embodiment 2]
Next, Embodiment 2 in the case where an item grant process having a different form from the item grant process shown in FIG. 47 is executed will be described.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the item assigning process, and FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the exchange of data between the portable terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 regarding this process. The control unit 210 determines whether or not the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the mobile terminal 1100 is already registered in the player database (step S3701). As a result, when the terminal identification information is not already registered in the player database (step S3701; NO), the control unit 210 transmits to the portable terminal 1100 that item assignment is impossible (step S3702). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information has already been registered in the player database (step S3701; YES), the control unit 210 extracts earned coins and points from the player information corresponding to the player in the player database, Based on the privilege database (see FIG. 22C), items that can be given according to the extracted coins and points extracted are extracted (step S3703). Then, control unit 210 generates a list of extracted items, and transmits the generated item list to portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information (step S3704).

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 50G, a screen showing items that can be given is displayed on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100 that has made the item request. In this screen, the number of remaining gold coins, the remaining number of points, a link for selecting an item that can be granted, the number of gold coins or points required for the grant, the menu screen in FIG. 50 (D) A link to leave the shop is displayed for transition.

  Here, the number of remaining gold coins is 12, the remaining number of points is 1234 points, one gold coin for purchasing item A, along with a link for purchasing item A, or , 100 points are required, and two gold coins are required to purchase item B, along with a link to purchase item B.

  In the screen of FIG. 50G, when the player selects a link corresponding to a desired item type, data indicating the selected item type is transmitted to the management server 1200.

  When receiving the item type desired by the player from the portable terminal 1100 (step S3705; YES), the control unit 210 reads the item data indicated by the received item type from the storage location indicated by the privilege database, and It transmits to the terminal 1100 (step S3706).

  Thereby, the player can acquire content data or data such as a two-dimensional code indicating an exchange ticket or an application ticket.

  Returning to the menu selection acceptance process shown in FIG. 44, when each other link is selected by the player (step S3409; YES), the control unit 210 executes a process according to the selected link (step S3409). S3410). For example, when a history display link is selected by the player, the control unit 210 transmits screen data for allowing the player to select a date to the portable terminal 1100. Thereby, a date selection screen as shown in FIG. 50E is displayed on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100. On this date selection screen, a link of date choices of game history information corresponding to the player in the game history database is displayed. When one of the links is selected by the player, the control unit 210 controls the game based on the game history information on the date corresponding to the selected link and the player information corresponding to the player. The game history of the person is extracted and transmitted to the portable terminal 1100. Thereby, a history display screen as shown in FIG. 50C is displayed on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100.

  In the slot machine of this embodiment, when displaying the main menu screen for displaying the two-dimensional code, the same processing as S2204 to S2207 in FIG. 24 is performed as in the first embodiment. Alternatively, the mobile terminal 1100 may be detected to automatically display the main menu screen (or two-dimensional code). Furthermore, the same process as the item grant process of FIG. 47 may be performed to give an item related to the set effect or an item set by the player.

  As described above, according to the gaming system 1001 of this embodiment, in the game using the function of accumulating the game history in the slot machine 1, the game result unfavorable for the player such as the difference in the number of medals becomes negative. When the game is finished at, the probability of acquiring stock coins is set to be higher. Therefore, even if the player loses the game, the player can actively output the two-dimensional code and maintain the willingness to receive a privilege from the management server 1200. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the player leaves without outputting the two-dimensional code after the game is finished, and as a result, it can be expected to promote utilization of services provided by the gaming system 1001.

  The determination of whether the game result is advantageous or unfavorable for the player is based on the difference in the number of medals, but the criterion is an arbitrary design item. For example, 0 sheets may be used as a reference, or a negative number or a positive number may be used as a reference. In addition, the probability of acquiring stock coins is not limited to two cases, which are advantageous and disadvantageous, and may be changed in a plurality of stages depending on the degree of advantage and the degree of disadvantage. For example, when the difference number of medals is −1001 or less, the probability is the highest, and thereafter −1000 to −500, −500 to 0, 0 to 500, 500 to 1000, 1001 or more, and so on. The probability may be lowered every time the medal difference number increases.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when a lottery condition for stock coin acquisition is satisfied at the end of a game game using a function for storing a game history, a stock coin acquisition lottery effect (JACKPOT effect) is executed. To do. For this reason, a player's gambling feeling is enshrined, and interest can be improved.

  Even if the stock coin acquisition lottery condition is not satisfied, the JACKPOT effect may be executed. However, in this case, an effect screen (FIG. 21B) indicating that acquisition has failed is always displayed.

  Moreover, at the time of JACKPOT production, for example, the expected degree of acquisition may be indicated by the display of the background or character, the output of sound or sound effects, and the like.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the stock coin data is reset by lottery when the power is turned on or when a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on. For this reason, even when an individual owns the slot machine 1, an inappropriate acquisition of coins by frequently repeating a game in a state after power-on, or a long time (for example, a normal game store) Inappropriate acquisition of coins due to a game of a time exceeding the available game time) can be prevented.

  Although the time from when the power is turned on until the stock coin data is reset can be set arbitrarily, it is preferable to set the time longer than the normal business hours of the amusement store (for example, 20 hours). If such a time is set, resetting of stock coin data during business hours (game time) is avoided, and the player is not discouraged or distrusted.

  Note that stock coin data may be reset at a predetermined time. Even in this case, inappropriate acquisition of coins due to a long game can be prevented. Even in this case, for the same purpose as described above, it is preferable to set a time that is not the normal business hours of the amusement store (for example, midnight).

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when a “stock coin hint” is selected by a player within a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) after resetting the stock coin data, the stock coin storage area Regardless of the value content of the stock coin data stored in, one of the predetermined screens shown in (a) to (d) of FIG. 14 is displayed. By doing in this way, it becomes difficult for a player to determine whether or not stock coin data has been reset, and it is possible to improve interest.

  In the above embodiment, a password is applied as information that can identify a game history input to the gaming machine (slot machine 1), and it is necessary to provide a dedicated reading device or the like to input information from the outside. It can be said that it is preferable, but it may be data such as a bar code or a two-dimensional code that can be read by a code reader provided in the gaming machine, wired connection, wireless connection, infrared connection, etc. Therefore, the data may be data that can be input to the gaming machine. With such a configuration, the data can be easily input.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a two-dimensional code is applied as information that can specify a game history output from the gaming machine (slot machine 1), and data can be easily obtained by simply holding the two-dimensional code reader over the player. It can be said that the data can be obtained, but it may be output by other code data that can be read by a code reader such as a barcode, or by data that can be output by wired connection, wireless connection, infrared connection, etc. Furthermore, a password may be applied in the same manner as information input to the gaming machine.

  In the above embodiment, only the mobile terminal 1100 to which the terminal identification information is given and the transmission of the terminal identification information is permitted is allowed to be accessed by the management server 1200. At least the mobile terminal If the player is identified by information (Cookie) that can identify 1100, or if the player can be identified by the player ID assigned on the management server 1200 side, the mobile terminal to which terminal identification information is assigned Or it is good also as a structure which permits the access from the portable terminal in which transmission of terminal identification information is not permitted.

  In the above embodiment, the player information registered in the player database and the game history information registered in the game history database are managed using the terminal identification information as a key item. A possible player ID may be managed as a key item.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the above embodiment, contents such as coin acquisition specifications between games (see FIG. 12A), stock coin stock specifications (see FIG. 12C), stock coin acquisition lottery conditions, etc. Is merely an example, and is not limited to these contents. For example, in the coin acquisition specification between games, when a high level mission is achieved, all stock coins may be acquired. By doing in this way, a player's willingness to play can be raised and an interest property can be improved.

  Further, when there is no stock coin, a higher condition may be imposed on the player in coin acquisition between games (see FIG. 12A) than when there is a stock coin. In this case, for example, the type of coins acquired by the player may be ranked up (for example, gold or silver for copper, gold for silver). In this way, even if all the stock coins are acquired by the previous player at the end of the game (also known to the surrounding players by the JACKPOT production), the next player has a willingness to play. The game in the slot machine 1 can be started without lowering.

[Embodiment 3]
Next, a slot machine to which the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention is applied, a management server to which the management apparatus according to the third embodiment of the present invention is applied, and a game according to the third embodiment of the present invention comprising the same. The system will be described. Since the gaming system of this embodiment has a configuration common to the gaming system 1001 of the first embodiment described above, the configuration different from the first embodiment will be mainly described here.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a game using a function for storing a game history, a predetermined privilege is given to the player from the management server 1200. It was the structure which gives the coin (gold, silver, copper) which is exchange value. For this reason, the two-dimensional code output from the slot machine 1 includes acquired data as shown in FIGS. On the other hand, the slot machine of this embodiment does not have a configuration for giving coins. In the two-dimensional code output from the slot machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c), instead of the acquired data, a game is entered after entering a password or after selecting “easy start”. The medal difference number up to the end time is stored.

  On the other hand, when the management server of this embodiment receives an update request (simple start update request, normal update request) from the mobile terminal 1100, it is given to the player based on the received game history update data and medal difference number. Determine the type and number of coins to be played. In this case, the management server indicates that the game has been ended with an advantageous game result if it indicates that the game has ended with an unfavorable game result such as a negative medal difference. The ratio of giving more coins (including the increase in the number of coins and the upgrade of the coin type) is higher than in the case of.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the slot machine does not need to have a complicated function and can be expected to have the same effect as that of the first embodiment. That is, even if the game is lost, the player can actively output a two-dimensional code and maintain the willingness to receive a privilege from the management server. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the situation where the player leaves without outputting the two-dimensional code after the game is finished, and as a result, it can be expected to promote the utilization of the service provided by the gaming system.

  Note that the management server may give points under higher conditions when the medal difference number indicates that the game has ended with a game result unfavorable to the player.

  In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, the slot machine is configured to calculate not the medal difference number but the total number of medals acquired by the player during the game period and the total number of medals inserted by the player. You may make it output by including in a dimension code. In this case, the medal difference number may be obtained on the management server side by subtracting the total number of medals inserted by the player from the total number of medals acquired by the player.

  In the slot machine of this embodiment, when displaying a main menu screen for displaying a two-dimensional code, the same processing as S2204 to S2207 in FIG. 24 is performed as in the first embodiment. Alternatively, the mobile terminal 1100 may be detected to automatically display the main menu screen (or two-dimensional code). Furthermore, the same process as the item grant process of FIG. 47 may be performed to give an item related to the set effect or an item set by the player.

[Embodiment 4]
In the fourth embodiment, a case where the slot machine 1 in the first embodiment described above is replaced with a pachinko gaming machine 700 will be described.

  First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 700 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 56 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 700. FIG.

  The pachinko gaming machine 700 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 700 includes a glass door frame 702 formed in a frame shape that can be opened and closed in the game frame. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. And the board 706).

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 703 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 702. On the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray 703, a chance button 7111 is provided that is operated when a specific effect is executed in the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). The chance button 7111 corresponds to the effect switch 56 of the slot machine 1 described in the first embodiment.

  A selection button 112A operated when selecting various setting items as described with reference to FIGS. 13, 15, 16, and 19 is provided on the front surface of the hitting ball supply tray 703 where the chance button 7111 is provided. , 7112B. These selection buttons 7112A and 7112B correspond to the stop switches 8L and 8R at the time of displaying the screen as shown in FIGS. 13, 15, 16 and 19 of the slot machine 1 described in the first embodiment.

  Under the hitting ball supply tray 703, there are an extra ball receiving tray 704 for storing game balls as game media that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 703, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 705 for emitting hitting balls (game balls). Is provided. A game board 706 (see FIG. 5) is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 702. The game board 706 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 707 is formed on the front surface of the game board 706 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down. A large number of nails for guiding a game ball are implanted in the game area 707.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 707, an effect display device 709 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. In the effect display device 709, a change display (also referred to as variable display, update display, or cyclic display) of effect symbols (decorative symbols) synchronized with the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. The variation display of the effect symbols is executed in various variations such as scroll display and on-site switching display. The effect display device 709 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each. In the effect display device 709, an effect symbol display area for displaying an effect symbol on the display screen is provided. For example, three (left, middle, right) of the effect symbol display area (plural) ) Has a symbol display area as a display area for variably displaying the effect symbols. Each of these three effect symbols is an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. The effect display device 709 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variation control of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display unit 708a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 709 to execute the effect display along with the variation display, and the second special symbol display unit 708a executes the second special display. When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 708b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  On the left side of the upper portion of the effect display device 709 in the game board 706, there is a first special symbol display (first variation display means) 708a that variably displays the first special symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. Is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 708a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of displaying the numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. In other words, the first special symbol display 708a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the right side of the upper portion of the effect display device 709 in the game board 706, there is a second special symbol display (second variation display means) 708b that variably displays a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. Is provided. The second special symbol display 708b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the second special symbol display 708b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display unit 708a and the second special symbol display unit 708b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 708a and the second special symbol indicator 708b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator. The first special symbol is subjected to the variable display on the condition that the second special symbol display unit 708b does not execute the variable display of the second special symbol. For the second special symbol, the variable display is executed on the condition that the first special symbol display unit 708a does not execute the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed without being variably displayed at the same time.

  For the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning port 713 or the second start winning port) 714), the display start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The game is started based on the fact that the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a winning opening (a game ball has entered). Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  In the following description, the fact that the game ball has won the first start prize opening 713 may be referred to as a first start prize, and the fact that the game ball has won the second start prize opening 714 will be referred to as a second start prize. There is a case. The data related to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is held and stored as reserved storage data that is a right to perform variable display of the special symbol until the start condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-hold storage data is stored in a predetermined area of a RAM 755 of a game control microcomputer 7560 described later. On-hold storage data for the first start prize is stored in the first on-hold storage buffer as first on-hold storage data with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit, and on-premise storage data for the second start prize is stored in a predetermined number (for example, 4). Is stored in the second reserved storage buffer as second reserved storage data.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 700, a ball striking device for driving a driving motor in response to a player operating a ball striking operation handle 705 and launching a game ball to the game area 707 using the rotational force of the driving motor (see FIG. Not shown). A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 707 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 707, and then descends the game area 707. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 713 and is detected by the first start port switch 713a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 708a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 709 starts the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol). Is done. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 713. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 714 and is detected by the second start port switch 714a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 708b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 709 starts the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Is done. In other words, the variation display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 714. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 709 is used for decoration (effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b. The effect design (decoration design) is displayed as a variation design. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start point and end point of variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same) and the period of variable display is substantially the same (may be exactly the same). In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 708b, the effect display device 709 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed. The first special symbol display device 708a, the second special symbol display device 708b, and the effect display device 709 described above are variable display devices that perform variable display of identification information and derive and display the display result, and are used as a variable display unit. It is done.

  In the effect display device 709, when the variable display is started, for example, all of the left, middle, and right effect symbols start the variable display. Then, the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are variably displayed basically stop in a predetermined order (for example, a predetermined order such as the order of the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol, and the middle effect symbol). When a predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of variation display, all the left, middle and right effect symbols are stopped and the display result is confirmed. The order in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols stop may be other than the order of the left, right, and center symbols. Further, the left, middle, and right effect symbols may be stopped simultaneously.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 713 is provided below the effect display device 709. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 713 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the first start opening switch 713a.

  A variable winning ball device (electric tulip) having a second starting winning port 714 (second starting port) through which a game ball can win is located below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 713. ) 715 is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 714 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the second start opening switch 714a. The variable winning ball device 715 is opened by a solenoid 716. When the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second start winning port 714 (it is easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 714 than the first starting winning port 713. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 714. Note that, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that although it is difficult to win, it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win). As described above, the state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state may be a state where the game ball is difficult to win or does not win the second start winning port 714.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning port 713 and the second start winning port 714 may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  When the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading toward the variable winning ball device 715 is very likely to win the second start winning port 714. The first start winning opening 713 is provided directly below the effect display device 709, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 709 and the first start winning opening 713 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The winning percentage of the second starting prize opening 714 is such that the nails are densely arranged around the area 713 and the arrangement of the nails around the first starting prize opening 713 is difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting prize opening 713. You may make it make higher than the winning rate of the 1st start winning opening 713.

  Below the first special symbol display 708a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 713, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start winning memory) 4 is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 718a composed of two displays (for example, LEDs) is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 718a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 708a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Below the second special symbol display 708b is a second special symbol hold comprising four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 714, that is, the second reserved memory number. A storage indicator 718b is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 718b increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 708b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, the display screen of the effect display device 709 is provided with a first reserved memory display unit 718c that displays the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 718d that displays the second reserved memory number. (Each display area is provided). In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display unit for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, a variable winning ball apparatus 715 that opens and closes only with respect to the second start winning opening 714 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 714 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  A reach state may occur during the effect symbol display on the effect display device 709. Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 709 constitute a part of the combination of jackpot symbols, the variation of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. Or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of a combination of jackpot symbols. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (such as an effect design)) is displayed, or a background image display mode (for example, a color or the like) of the effect display device 709 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set such that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than a normal reach (normal reach), and there is a high degree of reliability for the big hit. Such special (specific) reach is called super reach.

  As shown in FIG. 56, a special variable winning ball device 720 is provided below the variable winning ball device 715. The special variable winning ball apparatus 720 includes an opening / closing plate, and can be changed into an open state (first state) in which a game ball can be won and a closed state (second state) in which the game ball does not win. Device. Note that the special variable winning ball device 720 may be configured so that in the closed state, it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win). Thus, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 720 is in the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is difficult to win or does not win the special variable winning ball device 720.

  The special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is a solenoid in a specific game state (a big hit game state) that occurs when a specific display result (a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 708a or the second special symbol display unit 708b. When the opening / closing plate is controlled to be in the open state by 721, the large winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball that has won a big winning opening is detected by a count switch 723.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state where the special variable winning ball device 720 is opened is called a round. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, and when it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected. In this embodiment, the control example in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened only once in one round is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it perform control which makes the ball | bowl apparatus 720 open.

  A normal symbol display 710 (not shown) is provided below the effect display device 709. The normal symbol display 710 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called “normal symbols” (for example, “◯” and “x”).

  When the game ball passes through the gate 732 and is detected by the gate switch 732a, the display variation display of the normal symbol display 710 is started. In this embodiment, the left and right lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when lit) are alternately lit to perform variable display. For example, if the left lamp is lit at the end of the variable display, it is a win. And when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 710 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol ◯), the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is opened for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 715 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 714). To change.

  In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 710, a normal symbol hold storage display 741 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 732 is provided. Every time there is a game ball passing through the gate 732, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 732a, the normal symbol hold storage display 741 increases the number of indicators to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable symbol display on the normal symbol indicator 710 is started, the number of indicators that are lit is reduced by one. There are four upper limit values for the number of ordinary symbols stored, and the normal symbol storage memory display 741 lights the display with these four as upper limits.

  Decorative LEDs 725 flashing and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 707 of the game board 706, and an outlet 726 into which a hit ball that has not been won is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 727R and 727L that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 707. A top frame LED 728a, a left frame LED 728b, and a right frame LED 728c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 707. For example, the top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, and the right frame LED 728c are related to each other in the re-variation period (including the initial variation period) during one variation period as a repetitive variation pattern. When an effect such that the effect is executed) is executed, blinking control is performed.

  The repeated variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a specific effect display is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times after a special symbol and an effect symbol change display is started and a display result is derived and displayed, and then a reach effect is executed. . Here, the specific effect display is, for example, an effect display such as an effect display for re-variation, and if it is an effect display that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times, for example, an effect display other than the re-change display such as a notice display is possible. There may be. In this embodiment, as an example of a repeated variation pattern, an example will be described in which a pseudo-variable variation pattern that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times with re-variation as a specific effect display is described.

  Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for pseudo-continuous variation.

  In addition, the pseudo-ream is within the variation time determined with respect to one start winning prize in order to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one starting winning prize. In this case, a special variation pattern (also referred to as a variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are executed a predetermined number of times for all the symbol strings (left, middle, right). For example, as the number of re-variation repeated executions (also referred to as quasi-continuous re-variation times) increases, the reliability that is a big hit (the big hit is for all selection ratios including the big hit and the loss of big hit) The degree of the ratio that is sometimes selected, the ratio of the jackpot, that is, the reliability of the jackpot) increases. More specifically, the ratio selected when it is determined that the jackpot is high. In the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, a combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 709 is called a temporary stop symbol combination. The combination of temporary stop symbols is determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances among a plurality of types of chances (hereinafter referred to as pseudo continuous chances) composed of combinations of symbols other than the jackpot symbol combination. Further, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed, some reach effect may be executed as a final reach state.

  Also, a prize ball LED 751 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame LED 728b, and a ball cut LED 752 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame LED 728c. . The top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, the right frame LED 728c, and the decoration LED 725 are an example of an effect light emitter provided in the pachinko gaming machine 700. In addition to the above-described various LEDs for production (decoration), LEDs and lamps for production are installed.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 700 (not shown).

  FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 731. FIG. 57 also shows a payout control board 737, an effect control board 780, and the like. A game control microcomputer 7560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 700 according to a program is mounted on the main board 731.

  The game control microcomputer 7560 includes a ROM 754 that stores a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 755 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 756 that performs control operations according to the program, and an I / O 757. In this embodiment, the ROM 754 and the RAM 755 are built in the game control microcomputer 7560. That is, the game control microcomputer 7560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the RAM 755 in addition to the CPU 756, and the ROM 754 may be externally attached or incorporated. Further, the I / O 757 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 7560 further includes a random number circuit 7503 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 7560, the CPU 756 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 754. Therefore, hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 7560 (or CPU 756) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 756 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 731.

  The random number circuit 7503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to win a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. Random number circuit 7503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 7503 includes a numerical data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), a numerical data update rule selection setting function, and a numerical data update rule. It has various functions such as a selection switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 7560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 7560 (an ID number assigned to each product of the game control microcomputer 7560) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 754. The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 7503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 7560 reads numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 7503 when a start winning to the first start port switch 713a or the second start port switch 714a occurs, and starts to change the special symbol and effect symbol Sometimes it is determined whether or not to make a big hit display result as a specific display result based on the random R, that is, whether or not to make a big hit. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM 755 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 755 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). In particular, at least data corresponding to the gaming state, that is, the state controlled by the gaming control microcomputer 7560 (such as the special symbol process flag and the value of each reserved memory number counter) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. Saved in. The data according to the control state by the game control microcomputer 7560 is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of the power failure or the like. is there. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 755 is backed up.

  A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 7560. A reset circuit for generating a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like are in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like are in an operation stop state. Therefore, an allowance signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 7560 or the like is output during a period in which the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer in which the reset signal is at a low level. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation such as 7560 is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Furthermore, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V, DC5V, etc.) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). Further, a clear signal (not shown) indicating that a clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560.

  Further, an input driver circuit for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 732a, the first start port switch 713a, the second start port switch 714a, the count switch 723, the general winning port switch 711, and the recovery path sensor 712 to the game control microcomputer 7560. 758 is also mounted on the main board 731. When the main board 731 receives the detection signals from the various switches, the main board 731 sends out a prize ball signal for executing a prize ball payout according to the various switches to the payout control board 737. When the payout control board 737 receives the prize ball signal, it drives the ball payout device 797 to pay out the prize ball according to the prize ball signal.

  The general winning opening switch 711 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 706 and detects, for example, a game ball that has entered a general winning opening (not shown) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. Switch. Based on the detection of the game ball by the general winning opening switch 711, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  The collection passage sensor 712 is a transmissive optical sensor that is installed at a predetermined position in a common passage through which all game balls collected by the pachinko gaming machine 700 pass and detects the passage of the game balls.

  Also, an output circuit 759 for driving a solenoid 716 for opening / closing the variable winning ball device 715 and a solenoid 721 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball device 720 for forming a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 7560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 731. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 731.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 780 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 7560 via the relay board 777. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 709 that displays the effect symbols in a variable manner is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, an operation signal from the chance button 7111 is input to the effect control board 780, and the effect and the operation signal according to the operation signal from the chance button 7111 are shown in FIG. 13, FIG. 15, FIG. Execute the decision operation on the screen described.

  Further, in this embodiment, the operation control signals from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B are input to the effect control board 780, and FIGS. 13, 15, 16, and 16 are displayed in accordance with the operation signals from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B. The selection operation on the screen described in 19 is executed.

  The effect control board 780 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer (not shown) including an effect control CPU and a RAM (both not shown). The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 780, the effect control CPU operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown) and receives a signal from the main board 731 input via the relay board 777. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via an input driver and an input port (both not shown). Further, the effect control CPU causes a VDP (video display processor) (not shown) to perform display control of the effect display device 709 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP that performs display control of the effect display device 709 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer is mounted on the effect control board 780. The VDP has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer, and maps the VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. The VDP then outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 709.

  The effect control CPU reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 709, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols) in advance. The effect control CPU outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP. The VDP performs display control based on data input from the CPU for effect control.

  The production control CPU executes production and determination of selection items on the screens of FIGS. 13, 15, 16, and 19 in accordance with the operation signal input from the chance button 7111. The effect control CPU executes selection of selection items on the screens of FIGS. 13, 15, 16, and 19 in accordance with the operation signals input from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B.

  The effect control board 780 is connected to a power supply circuit (not shown), and the effect control CPU of the effect control board 780 has a power supply monitoring function for monitoring that power is supplied from the power supply circuit.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to an input driver (not shown) on the effect control board 780. The input driver allows the signal input from the relay board 777 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 780 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 780 to the relay board 777). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a means.

  Further, the effect control CPU outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 735 via an output port (not shown). Further, the effect control CPU outputs sound number data to the audio output board 770 via the output port.

  In the lamp driver board 735, a signal for driving the LED is input to an LED driver (not shown) via an input driver (not shown). The LED driver supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, and the right frame LED 728c. Further, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 725 provided on the game board 706 side. When a light emitter other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitter is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 735.

  In the voice output board 770, the sound number data is input to a voice synthesis IC (not shown) via an input driver (not shown). The voice synthesizing IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to an amplifier circuit (not shown). The amplifier circuit outputs to the speakers 727R and 727L an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by a volume (not shown). Further, control data corresponding to the sound number data is stored in a sound data ROM (not shown). The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time-series manner in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  The total number of games and the number of BBs (the number of RBs) in the gaming history of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above can be replaced with the total number of rotations and the number of jackpots in the variable display of the effect display device 709 of the pachinko gaming machine 700. it can. Further, the medal difference number calculated by the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment can be replaced with the game ball difference number obtained by subtracting the total number of game balls that have been struck out from the total number of game balls that have been paid out. For example, the total number of game balls paid out can be calculated based on the detection results of the first start port switch 713a, the second start port switch 714a, the count switch 723, and the general winning port switch 711. Further, the total number of game balls that have been struck can be calculated based on the detection result of the collection passage sensor 712.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 700, when displaying a main menu screen for displaying a two-dimensional code, the same processing as S2204 to S2207 in FIG. 1100 may be detected and the main menu screen (or two-dimensional code) may be automatically displayed. Furthermore, the same process as the item grant process of FIG. 47 may be performed to give an item related to the set effect or an item set by the player.

  Next, a specific operation example of the pachinko gaming machine 700 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an effect control microcomputer (specifically, an effect control CPU) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 780. In the main process, the effect control CPU starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S7001). .

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU executes a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a predetermined random number (step S7002). Then, the timer interrupt flag is monitored (step S7003). If the timer interrupt flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S7002. When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU clears the flag (step S7004), and executes the effect control process of steps S7005 to S7011.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S7005).

  Next, the CPU for effect control follows a process similar to steps S4005 to S4009 of FIG. 23 shown in the first embodiment, a main menu display process (step S7006), a main menu operation process before password input (step S7007), a level. A coin-related process (step S7008), a main menu operation process after password entry (step S7009), and a special effect execution process (step S7010) are executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU performs effect control process processing (step S7011). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 709 is executed.

  Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, coins of gold, silver, and copper are given and stock coins are also stocked. FIG. 59 is an explanatory view showing coin acquisition specifications between games and stock specifications of stock coins in the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 59A shows the coin acquisition specification when a password is input. In this embodiment, for example, when winning a jackpot, one gold coin, one silver coin, and one copper coin are awarded with a probability of 100%. In addition, every time the variable display is executed 2000 times, any one of gold, silver, and copper coins is given with a probability of 100%. However, the probability that a coin of a good color (copper → gold or silver, silver → gold) will be increased as the number of times of variable display increases.

  Also, when a mission is completed, coins are awarded with a probability of 100% according to the level of the achieved mission. For example, when a high level mission is achieved, one gold, one silver and one copper coin is awarded. In addition, when a mission in the level is completed, any two coins of gold, silver, and copper are awarded, and when a mission of a low level is achieved, any one of the coins of gold, silver, and copper is awarded. Is done. In addition to the acquisition of coins between such games, as will be described in detail later, when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the game, coins are awarded to the player.

  Further, when the mission of high level and medium is achieved, a coin to be given is added on condition that there is a stock coin described later. In this case, for example, when a mission of a high level is achieved, any two of gold, silver, and copper coins are added, and when a mission during the level is achieved, any of gold, silver, and copper coins is given. One additional card is added.

  In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the advantage of coin acquisition conditions differs between when a password is input and when “Easy Start” is selected, and when a password is input. Can win coins more advantageously than when “Easy Start” is selected.

  FIG. 59B shows a coin acquisition specification when “easy start” is selected. For example, when winning a jackpot, one gold coin, one silver coin and one copper coin are awarded with a probability of 50%. In addition, every time the variable display is executed 2000 times, any one of gold, silver, and copper coins is given with a probability of 50%. However, the probability that a coin of a good color (copper → gold or silver, silver → gold) will be increased as the number of times of variable display increases.

  Also, at the time of mission completion, coins are awarded with a probability of 50% according to the level of the mission completed. For example, when a high level mission is achieved, one gold, one silver and one copper coin is awarded. In addition, when a mission in the level is completed, any two coins of gold, silver, and copper are awarded, and when a mission of a low level is achieved, any one of the coins of gold, silver, and copper is awarded. Is done. In addition to the acquisition of coins between such games, as will be described in detail later, when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the game, coins are awarded to the player.

  In addition, when a mission of high level and medium is achieved, a coin to be given is added on condition that there is a stock coin. In this case, for example, when a mission of a high level is achieved, any two of gold, silver, and copper coins are added, and when a mission during the level is achieved, any of gold, silver, and copper coins is given. One additional card is added.

  When a coin is awarded to the player, the acquired data (acquired gold, silver, and bronze coins) stored in the acquired coin area assigned to the RAM of the effect control microcomputer according to the content of the coin. (Data indicating the number of sheets) is updated.

  FIG. 59 (c) shows stock coin stock specifications. For example, when winning a jackpot, one of gold, silver and copper coins is stocked with a probability of 100%. Further, every time the variable display is executed 100 times, any one of gold, silver, and copper coins is stocked with a probability of 20%.

  When a new coin is stocked, the stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area assigned to the RAM of the effect control microcomputer is updated according to the content of the coin.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S7011) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU first executes a first predetermined effect process (step S810A) and a second predetermined effect process (step S810B).

  Next, the effect control CPU performs one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 709 is controlled, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is realized. However, the control related to the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with changes in special symbols is also executed in one effect control process. The decorative display variable display synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the decorative display variable display synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is executed depending on which effect control process processing is performed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 7560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801).

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process (step S802).

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Decoration symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the ornament symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 709 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect process (step S807): In the effect display device 709, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an execution section for a predetermined effect. In the “predetermined effect”, whether or not a specific effect (reach effect) is executed in the variation display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol, or a state where the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is likely to enter (pass) (for example, open) This is an effect for notifying whether or not the state is controlled. In this embodiment, it may be notified that a predetermined type of hit (for example, a small hit) is made in a predetermined effect. In this embodiment, in a predetermined effect, an effect in a form of rotating the roulette on the display screen of the effect display device 709 is executed. Note that it is not always necessary to notify that the 100% specific effect is executed in the predetermined effect, or to notify that the 100% variable winning ball device 715 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. Notification that suggests the possibility of the performance being performed, or notification that suggests the possibility that the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is controlled so that the game ball is likely to enter may be provided. The predetermined effect is executed by an effect control microcomputer.

  In the example shown in FIG. 61, the predetermined effect is executed in the order of the sign effect, the start effect, the notification effect, and the result notification effect. The period in which the sign effect is executed is referred to as a first period, and the period in which the start effect, the notification effect, and the result notification effect are executed is referred to as a second period.

  Also, the execution of the first period effect (predictive effect) may be omitted. In addition, the period of the result notification effect may be shortened.

  The sign effect is an effect that reminds the player that the predetermined effect is started. The start effect is an effect for causing the player to recognize that the predetermined effect has started. The notification effect is an effect that causes the player to expect the variable winning ball device 715 to be controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. The result notification effect is an effect that allows the player to recall whether or not the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter.

  In addition, it is desirable to provide a case where after the indication effect of the first period is executed, it does not develop into an effect after the start effect of the second period (in this example, a roulette effect). By doing so, not only the expectation that roulette and other effects may be performed, but also the anxiety that it may not necessarily develop into roulette and other effects are performed. It is possible to enhance the effect of the indication effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a predetermined effect is executed by determining the presence or absence of a predetermined effect and a notification result triggered by the start of a variable symbol display, the special symbol and the decorative symbol change. In some cases, the start of the display triggers the presence or absence of a predetermined effect and the notification result to execute the predetermined effect. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the predetermined effect that is executed by the determination process triggered by the start of the normal symbol variation display is referred to as a “first predetermined effect”, and the start of the special symbol or decorative symbol variation display is started. There is a case where a predetermined effect that is executed when the determination process is performed as an opportunity is referred to as a “second predetermined effect”.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, there are a roulette mode in which an effect of a mode in which a roulette rotates is performed and a dice mode in which an effect of a mode in which a dice is performed are performed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, there are red effect colors and blue effect colors as predetermined effect colors. Therefore, in this embodiment, the combination of the production mode and the production color of the predetermined production is a roulette mode in which the production color is red, a roulette mode in which the production color is blue, a dice mode in which the production color is red, and a production color. There are four types with blue dice.

  Next, a specific example of an effect mode of a predetermined effect will be described. FIG. 62 to FIG. 65 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the production mode of the predetermined performance executed in the roulette mode. FIG. 66 to FIG. 69 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the production mode of the predetermined effect executed in the dice mode.

  First, the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the predetermined effect performed in a roulette aspect is demonstrated using FIGS. 62-65. First, FIG. 62 illustrates an effect for notifying that the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is controlled so that a game ball can easily enter.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, the variation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the variation (variable display) of the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped in the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 62B). ). At that time, display control is performed such that the character image 9a displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves. The effect by such display control corresponds to the sign effect.

  Next, control for displaying a notification image (for example, an image displaying “roulette chance”) 9b, which is an image for an effect as if a predetermined effect is started, is executed (see FIG. 62C). . The effect by such display control corresponds to the start effect. Then, the notification effect is started.

  In this embodiment, the notification effect in the predetermined effect in the roulette mode is an effect in which the design fluctuates in the effect area 9F (an effect in a mode in which the roulette rotates) (see FIG. 62D). Thereafter, in the effect area 9F, an image 9c is displayed that suggests that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (see FIG. 62E). Next, a notification image 9d is displayed to notify that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (see FIG. 62F). Thereafter, the effect display device 709 displays an image 9e that clearly indicates that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (open state) (see FIG. 62F). Note that a period during which display control as shown in FIGS. 62E and 62F is performed corresponds to a period of result notification effect.

  The production control microcomputer, for example, is variable based on receiving the normal symbol variation end designation command for designating that the variation display of the normal symbol is terminated after receiving the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command. The winning ball device 715 stops displaying the image 9c indicating that the game ball is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (see FIG. 62 (E)), and the normal electric accessory opening completion transmitted at the end of the first opening is completed. Based on the reception of the designation command, a notification image 9d for notifying that the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter is displayed (see FIG. 62F).

  The effect control microcomputer stops the image 9c that suggests that the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter after a lapse of a predetermined time from the reception of the normal symbol variation end designation command. You may make it display.

  The effect control microcomputer may display the notification image 9d when a predetermined time has elapsed since the image 9c was stopped and displayed. In this case, the notification image 9d is displayed in response to the reception of the normal symbol variation end designation command.

  Further, when the game control microcomputer 7560 is configured to transmit a normal electric accessory release start designation command at the start of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 715, the effect control microcomputer may The notification image 9d may be displayed at the time of receiving the ordinary electric accessory release start designation command or at the time of receiving the ordinary electric accessory release start designation command at the second opening.

  Further, the production control microcomputer displays the image 9c when a predetermined time (for example, the variation time) has elapsed after receiving the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command indicating that the display result is a winning symbol. Furthermore, the notification image 9d may be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, the time until the first opening of the variable winning ball device 715 ends) elapses. In this case, the notification image 9d is displayed upon reception of the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command.

  Next, FIG. 63 illustrates an effect for notifying that a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit) is achieved.

  As shown in FIG. 63A, the variation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the variation (variable display) of the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped in the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 63B). ). At that time, a sign effect such that the character image 9a displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves is executed.

  Next, a start effect that is as if a predetermined effect is to be started is executed (see FIG. 63C). Then, the notification effect is started.

  The notification effect in the predetermined effect in the roulette mode is an effect in which the design fluctuates in the effect area 9F (see FIG. 63D). Thereafter, in the effect area 9F, an image 9f that suggests a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit) is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 63E). Next, a notification image 9g that displays the occurrence of a predetermined type of hit is displayed (see FIG. 63F). Thereafter, the effect display device 709 displays an image 9h that clearly indicates that the second grand prize opening (by the movable member 76) is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (open state) (FIG. 63F). )reference). Note that a period during which display control as shown in FIGS. 63E and 63F is performed corresponds to a period of result notification effect.

  Next, FIG. 64 illustrates an effect for notifying that a reach effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 64A, the variation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the variation (variable display) of the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped in the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 64B). ). At that time, a sign effect such that the character image 9a displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves is executed.

  Next, a start effect which is an effect as if a predetermined effect is started is executed (see FIG. 64C). Then, the notification effect is started.

  The effect for notification in the predetermined effect in the roulette mode is an effect in which the design fluctuates in the effect area 9F (see FIG. 64D). Thereafter, in the effect area 9F, an image (image for informing that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high) 9i is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 64E). In the example shown in FIG. 64, an image including the character string “extreme heat” is shown as the image 9i that suggests reaching, but in this embodiment, the image that indicates reaching is reached. There are two types of images: an image including a character string of “extreme heat” and an image including a character string of “chance”. In this embodiment, in the case of super reach, the image including the character string of “hot” is stopped and displayed as compared with the image including the character string of “chance” compared to the case of normal reach. The ratio is high.

  Then, the display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state (see FIG. 64F). Thereafter, an image 9j that clearly indicates the occurrence of super reach is displayed on the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 64F). Note that a period during which display control as shown in FIGS. 64E and 64F is performed corresponds to a period of result notification effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, a predetermined effect for notifying that a specific effect (reach effect) is executed and that the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is controlled to be in a state where a game ball is likely to enter (pass) is executed. In such a case, before the notification result is notified, the specific effect (reach effect) is not executed, and the variable winning ball device 715 is not controlled to be in a state where the game ball easily enters (passes) (result of notification of outage). There is a case where a predetermined effect (that is, a “false” predetermined effect) is executed.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example in a case where a predetermined effect for notifying the result of notification of losing is executed before notifying that a specific effect (reach effect) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (A), the variation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the variation (variable display) of the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped in the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 65 (B)). ). At that time, a sign effect such that the character image 9a displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves is executed.

  Next, a start effect that is as if a predetermined effect is to be started is executed (see FIG. 65C). Then, the notification effect is started.

  The notification effect in the predetermined effect in the roulette mode is an effect in which the design fluctuates in the effect area 9F (see FIG. 65D). Thereafter, in the effect area 9F, the reach effect is not executed, and the variable winning ball device 715 is also stopped and displayed, which indicates that the game ball is not controlled to enter (pass) easily (passage notification result) ( FIG. 65 (E)).

  Next, the effect for the notification is again performed in the effect area 9F, and the effect that the effect for the notification is started is executed again (see FIG. 65F). Thereafter, in the effect area 9F, an image (image for informing that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high) 9i that suggests reaching is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 65 (G)). Then, the display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state (see FIG. 65 (H)). Thereafter, the effect display device 709 displays an image 9j that clearly indicates the occurrence of super reach (see FIG. 65 (I)).

  Next, a specific example of an effect mode of a predetermined effect executed in a dice mode will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 66 illustrates an effect for notifying that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled so that a game ball can easily enter.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (1), the variation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the variation (variable display) of the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped in the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 66 (2)). ). In this case, display control is performed so that the character image displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves as a predictive effect, as in the case of the predetermined effect of the roulette mode shown in FIGS. Also good.

  Next, control for displaying a notification image (for example, an image displaying “dice chance”) 9l that is an image for an effect as if a predetermined effect is started is executed (see FIG. 66 (3)). . The effect by such display control corresponds to the start effect. Then, the notification effect is started.

  In this embodiment, the effect for notification in the predetermined effect of the dice aspect is an effect of an aspect in which the dice is rotated below the display screen of the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 66 (4)). Thereafter, the rotation of the dice is stopped below the display screen of the effect display device 709, and an image 9m suggesting that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter is stopped and displayed (FIG. 66 ( See 5)). Next, a notification image 9n is displayed to notify that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (see FIG. 66 (6)). Thereafter, the effect display device 709 displays an image 9o that clearly indicates that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (open state) (see FIG. 66 (7)). Note that the period during which display control as shown in FIGS. 66 (6) and 66 (7) is performed corresponds to the period of result notification effect.

  The effect control microcomputer, for example, receives the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command and then receives the normal symbol variation end designation command, so that the variable winning ball device 715 can easily enter the game ball. An image 9m that suggests being controlled is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 66 (5)), and a variable winning ball is received based on the reception of the normal electric accessory opening end designation command transmitted at the end of the first opening. A notification image 9n is displayed to notify that the device 715 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (see FIG. 66 (6)).

  The effect control microcomputer stops the image 9m that suggests that the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter after a predetermined time has elapsed since the reception of the normal symbol variation end designation command. You may make it display.

  The effect control microcomputer may display the notification image 9n when a predetermined time has elapsed since the image 9m was stopped and displayed. In that case, the notification image 9n is displayed upon reception of the normal symbol variation end designation command.

  Further, when the game control microcomputer 7560 is configured to transmit a normal electric accessory release start designation command at the start of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 715, the effect control microcomputer may The notification image 9n may be displayed at the time of receiving the ordinary electric accessory release start designation command or at the time of receiving the ordinary electric accessory release start designation command at the second opening.

  Further, the production control microcomputer displays an image 9m when a predetermined time (for example, the variation time) has elapsed after receiving the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command indicating that the display result is a winning symbol. Furthermore, the notification image 9n may be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, the time until the first opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 715 ends) elapses. In this case, the notification image 9n is displayed in response to the reception of the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command.

  Next, FIG. 67 illustrates an effect for notifying that a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit) is made.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (1), the variation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the variation (variable display) of the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped in the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 67 (2)). ). In this case, display control is performed so that the character image displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves as a predictive effect, as in the case of the predetermined effect of the roulette mode shown in FIGS. Also good.

  Next, a start effect that is an effect as if the predetermined effect is started is executed (see FIG. 67 (3)). Then, the notification effect is started.

  The effect for notification in the predetermined effect of the dice aspect is an effect of an aspect in which the dice is rotated below the display screen of the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 67 (4)). Thereafter, the rotation of the dice stops at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 709, and an image 9p suggesting that a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit) is stopped and displayed (FIG. 67 (5)). reference). Next, a notification image 9q for notifying the occurrence of a predetermined type of hit is displayed (see FIG. 67 (6)). Thereafter, the effect display device 709 displays an image 9r clearly indicating that the second grand prize opening (by the movable member 76) is controlled to be in a state (open state) in which the game ball is likely to enter (FIG. 67 (7)). )reference). It should be noted that a period during which display control as shown in FIGS. 67 (6) and 67 (7) is performed corresponds to a period of result notification effect.

  Next, FIG. 68 illustrates an effect for notifying that a reach effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (1), the variation of the decorative symbol is started from the state in which the variation (variable display) of the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped in the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 68 (2)). ). In this case, display control is performed so that the character image displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves as a predictive effect, as in the case of the predetermined effect of the roulette mode shown in FIGS. Also good.

  Next, a start effect that is as if a predetermined effect is to be started is executed (see FIG. 68 (3)). Then, the notification effect is started.

  The notification effect in the predetermined effect of the dice aspect is an effect of an aspect in which the dice is rotated below the display screen of the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 68 (4)). Thereafter, an image (image for notifying that the expectation degree of jackpot is high) 9s indicating that the rotation of the dice stops and reaches reach is displayed below the display screen of the effect display device 709 (FIG. 68). (See (5)). In the example shown in FIG. 68, an image including the character string “extreme heat” is shown as the image 9s that suggests reaching, but in this embodiment, the image that indicates reaching is reached. There are two types of images: an image including a character string of “extreme heat” and an image including a character string of “chance”. In this embodiment, in the case of super reach, the image including the character string of “hot” is stopped and displayed as compared with the image including the character string of “chance” compared to the case of normal reach. The ratio is high.

  Then, the display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state (see FIG. 68 (6)). Thereafter, an image 9t that clearly indicates the occurrence of super reach is displayed on the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 67 (7)). It should be noted that a period during which display control as shown in FIGS. 68 (6) and (7) is performed corresponds to a period of result notification effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, a predetermined effect for notifying that a specific effect (reach effect) is executed and that the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is controlled to be in a state where a game ball is likely to enter (pass) is executed. In such a case, before the notification result is notified, the specific effect (reach effect) is not executed, and the variable winning ball device 715 is not controlled to be in a state where the game ball easily enters (passes) (result of notification of outage). There is a case where a predetermined effect (that is, a “false” predetermined effect) is executed.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example in a case where a predetermined effect for informing a notification result of losing is executed before notifying that a specific effect (reach effect) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (1), the variation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the variation (variable display) of the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped in the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 69 (2)). ). In this case, display control is performed so that the character image displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves as a predictive effect, as in the case of the predetermined effect of the roulette mode shown in FIGS. Also good.

  Next, a start effect which is an effect as if a predetermined effect is started is executed (see FIG. 69 (3)). Then, the notification effect is started.

  The effect for notification in the predetermined effect of the dice aspect is an effect of an aspect in which the dice is rotated below the display screen of the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 69 (4)). Thereafter, the rotation of the dice is stopped below the display screen of the effect display device 709, the reach effect is not executed, and the variable winning ball device 715 is not controlled to be in a state where the game ball is likely to enter (pass) (result of notification of loss). Is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 69 (5)).

  Next, the effect for the notification is started again such that the effect that the dice rotates in the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 709, and the effect that the notification effect is started again is executed (FIG. 69 (6)). )reference). Thereafter, the image 9s indicating that the rotation of the dice stops and reaches reach is displayed below the display screen of the effect display device 709 (an image for informing that the expectation degree of the big hit is high) 9s is stopped and displayed (FIG. 69). (Refer to (7)). Then, the display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state (see FIG. 69 (8)). Thereafter, an image 9t that clearly indicates the occurrence of super reach is displayed on the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 69 (9)).

  Also in the predetermined effect of the dice aspect shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the effect using the character image 9a may be performed in the same manner as the predetermined effect of the roulette aspect shown in FIGS.

  70 to 72 are flowcharts showing the first predetermined effect process (step S810A). In the first predetermined effect process, the predetermined effect is started when a predetermined condition is met, triggered by the start of the normal symbol variation display.

  In the first predetermined effect process, the effect control CPU checks whether or not a first predetermined effect executing flag indicating that the first predetermined effect is being executed is set (step S731). If the first predetermined effect executing flag is not set, the effect control CPU confirms whether or not the second predetermined effect executing flag indicating that the second predetermined effect is being executed is set ( Step S732). If the second predetermined effect execution flag is set, the process is terminated. If the second predetermined effect execution flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S741.

  When the first predetermined effect execution flag is set in step S731 (that is, when the first predetermined effect is being executed), the effect control CPU measures the effect period of the first predetermined effect. The value of the first predetermined effect timer for this is -1 (step S734). Then, when the value of the first predetermined effect timer becomes 0 (step S735), the first predetermined effect is ended (step S736). Further, the CPU for effect control resets the first predetermined effect executing flag (step S737).

  When the value of the first predetermined effect timer is not 0, when it is determined to execute “predetermined effect (◯)” in the process of step S759A, the effect control CPU ends the opening of the ordinary electric accessory. It is confirmed whether a designated command has been received (step S738). In step S738, the effect control CPU uses the normal electric accessory release end designation command transmitted first after receiving the normal symbol variation end designation command as a confirmation target. That is, a command related to the first opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is a confirmation target (when a normal electric accessory opening end designation command transmitted after the second time is received, the command is not received in step S738. .) When the CPU for effect control receives a normal electric accessory opening end designation command and is executing a predetermined effect in the roulette mode, the notification image 9d (see FIG. 9) is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709. 62 (F)) is displayed, and if the predetermined effect in the dice form is being executed, the notification image 9n (see FIG. 66 (6)) is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 (step 66). S739). Whether the predetermined effect mode is the roulette mode or the dice mode is specifically determined when the first predetermined effect in-progress flag is set or execution of the second predetermined effect is started in step S780 described later. Sometimes, when setting the second predetermined effect execution flag, information that can specify the mode and color of the predetermined effect, or the predetermined bits of the first predetermined effect execution flag and the second predetermined effect execution flag This can be determined by checking.

  When the value of the first predetermined effect timer is not 0, the effect control CPU receives, for example, the normal symbol variation end designation command after receiving the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command. Basically, if a predetermined effect in the roulette mode is being executed, an image 9c (see FIG. 62E) suggesting that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. If the display is stopped on the display screen of the effect display device 709 and a predetermined effect in the form of a dice is being executed, the image 9m suggests that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in a state where a game ball can easily enter. A process of stopping and displaying (see FIG. 66 (5)) on the display screen of the effect display device 709 is also performed. Whether the predetermined effect mode is the roulette mode or the dice mode is specifically determined when the first predetermined effect in-progress flag is set or execution of the second predetermined effect is started in step S780 described later. Sometimes, when setting the second predetermined effect execution flag, information that can specify the mode and color of the predetermined effect, or the predetermined bits of the first predetermined effect execution flag and the second predetermined effect execution flag This can be determined by checking.

  Since it is informed that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in the open state when the normal electric accessory opening end designation command transmitted first is received, the second variable winning ball device 715 is substantially controlled. It is notified that is controlled to the open state. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the second variable winning ball apparatus 715 has a long open period. Therefore, by executing the notification, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in the open state in the low base state.

  In the case where the game control microcomputer 7560 is configured to transmit a normal electric accessory release end designation command only at the end of the last release among a plurality of opening of the variable winning ball device 715, an effect is given. Whether or not a predetermined time (for example, the time until the first opening of the variable winning ball device 715 ends) has elapsed after the control CPU received the normal symbol variation end designation command in the process of step S738. If it has been confirmed, the process of step S739 may be executed. Also, whether or not a predetermined time (for example, the time until the first opening of the variable winning ball device 715 ends) has elapsed after the effect control CPU receives the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command. If it has been confirmed, the process of step S739 may be executed. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 7560 is configured to transmit a “winning game start command” when starting a winning game based on the normal symbol display result being a winning symbol, After the control CPU receives the “hit game start command”, it confirms whether or not a predetermined time (for example, the time until the first opening of the variable winning ball device 715 ends) has passed. In this case, the process of step S739 may be executed.

  In step S741, the CPU for effect control is set with a next variation flag (a flag indicating that it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect during the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol to be started next). Check if it is. If the next fluctuation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S761.

  When the next variation flag is not set, the effect control CPU is operating the non-variable period measurement timer (a timer for measuring a period during which the variation (variable display) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is not started). It is confirmed whether it is (not 0) (step S742). If the non-change period measurement timer is not operating, the process proceeds to step S751. Since the change of the special symbol and the change of the decorative symbol are synchronized, the following description will be made taking the change of the special symbol as an example.

  If the non-change period measurement timer is operating, the effect control CPU checks whether or not the special symbol change has started (step S743). Whether or not the variation of the special symbol is started is determined, for example, based on whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process or the decorative symbol variation process. When the change of the special symbol is started, the process proceeds to step S771.

  When the change of the special symbol is not started, the effect control CPU decrements the value of the non-change period measurement timer by −1 (step S744). When the value of the non-change period measurement timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S771 (step S745). If the value of the non-change period measurement timer is not 0, the process is terminated.

  In step S751, the effect control CPU receives a normal symbol variation start designation command indicating that it has received a normal symbol variation start designation command (ordinary symbol variation start designation (hit) command or normal symbol variation start designation (disconnection) command). It is checked whether the flag (ordinary symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag or ordinary symbol variation start designation (out)) command reception flag) is set. If it is not set, the process is terminated.

  When the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU confirms whether or not the game state data has a value indicating the high base state (step S752). If the value indicates a high base state, the process is terminated.

  If it is not a value indicating the high base state, the effect control CPU confirms whether or not it is a big hit gaming state (including a small hit gaming state) (step S753). Whether or not the game state is a big hit gaming state is confirmed, for example, by the value of the effect control process flag. In this case, it is assumed that the effect control CPU is in the big hit gaming state when the value of the effect control process flag is 4 or more. If it is a big hit gaming state, the process is terminated.

  When not in the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU confirms whether or not the symbol designation command corresponding to the small win is stored in the start winning storage area for storing the effect control command transmitted when the start winning occurs. (Step S754). If the symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit is stored, the process is terminated.

  When the symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit is not stored, the effect control CPU confirms whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S755). Whether or not the special symbol is changing is determined, for example, based on whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process or the decorative symbol change stopping process. When the special symbol is not changing, the CPU for effect control confirms whether or not one minute or more has elapsed since the change of the special symbol is finished (step S757).

  For example, the determination process of step S757 is realized by preparing a timer for measuring the time after the change of the special symbol is completed and checking the measurement value of the timer. If one minute or more has passed since the change of the special symbol is finished, the process is finished. If the time since the change of the special symbol is less than 1 minute, the process proceeds to step S759A.

  Also, ending the processing when one minute or more has passed since the change of the special symbol has taken into consideration that the player will continue playing for a while after the change of the special symbol has ended. Because. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the low base state is assumed to be 10 seconds, and the upper limit value of the gate passing memory number (ordinary reserved memory number) is 4, so [4 × 10 seconds] This is because it is considered better to execute the process of step S759A until a slightly longer time elapses.

  If the special symbol is changing, the effect control CPU checks whether or not a predetermined time (11.5 in this example) has elapsed since the start of the change (step S758). If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when the decoration pattern change (variable display) is executed by the change pattern in which the super reach effect is executed, the super reach effect is started after 11.5 seconds from the start of the change.

  When the predetermined time has not elapsed, the CPU for effect control determines the presence / absence of the first predetermined effect and the notification result (step S759A). Note that the elapsed time from the start of change is determined by, for example, the value of a change time timer set during execution of the change display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol).

  In step S759A, for example, the effect control CPU determines the presence / absence of the first predetermined effect and the notification result (which notification result is to be used) using the first predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG.

  In the first predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG. 73, when the display result of the normal symbol is changed to the off symbol (corresponding to the case where the normal symbol variation start designation (off) command reception flag is set) and the display of the normal symbol In accordance with each of cases where the result is a winning symbol (equivalent to the case where the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag is set), a determination value corresponding to not executing the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect The determination value corresponding to executing (×), the determination value corresponding to executing the predetermined effect (◯), and the determination corresponding to executing the predetermined effect (○) after the predetermined effect (×) Value is set. The predetermined effect (×) is a predetermined effect for notifying that the reach effect is not executed and the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is not controlled to be in a state where the game ball is likely to enter (pass) easily (missing notification result). The predetermined effect (◯) is a predetermined effect that notifies the variable winning ball device 715 that the game ball is controlled to enter (pass) easily. In the first predetermined effect determination table, at least a determination value corresponding to executing the predetermined effect may be set. FIG. 73 shows the number of determination values, not the determination value itself.

  In the process shown in step S759A, the configuration of the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 33 or FIG. 36 shown in the first embodiment is applied, and a predetermined effect (coin) can be determined in addition to the predetermined effect shown in FIG. However, when coins are acquired, it may be configured to be able to notify that there are acquired coins in a predetermined effect.

  Instead of the “notification content” (predetermined effect) mode shown in FIG. 73, or in addition to the “notification content” mode shown in FIG. 73, other modes may be used. For example, a patrol (emergency red light) -like image that is generally used for notifying the probability change, a character image used in a step-up notice effect for notifying the display result of a special symbol, or a jackpot notice An image or the like may be used as another mode. When these are used, an effect in which a certain effect is linked with a certain effect is realized, such as a certainty change confirmation notification, a step-up notification effect, a jackpot notification, and the like.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 73, even if it is the case of the normal figure, the predetermined effect is not executed at a low rate of 10%. The predetermined effect may be executed at a rate of 100%.

  In step S759A, the effect control CPU extracts a predetermined effect determining random number for determining the presence / absence of the predetermined effect and the notification result, and the predetermined effect determining random number corresponds to executing the predetermined effect. If it matches any of the above, it is determined to execute the predetermined effect. When the normal symbol variation start designation (out of) command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU uses the determination value related to “ordinary symbol outage” in the first predetermined effect determination table, and the normal symbol variation When the start designation (hit) command reception flag is set, the determination value relating to “per normal symbol” in the first predetermined effect determination table is used.

  Next, the CPU for effect control determines the aspect of the first predetermined effect and the effect color (step S759B). Then, control goes to a step S764. However, if it is determined in step S759A that the first predetermined effect is not executed, the effect control CPU proceeds to step S764 as it is without determining the first predetermined effect mode or effect color in step S759B. To do.

  In step S759B, the effect control CPU determines, for example, whether the first predetermined effect mode is the roulette mode or the dice mode, using the first predetermined effect mode determination table shown in FIG. .

  In the first predetermined effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 74 (A), when the display result of the normal symbol is changed to the off symbol (corresponding to the case where the normal symbol variation start designation (off) command reception flag is set), According to each of the case where the display result of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (corresponding to the case where the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag is set), a judgment value corresponding to the roulette mode The determination value corresponding to the dice mode is set. In FIG. 74A, not the determination value itself but the number of determination values is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (A), in this embodiment, when the normal symbol is shifted, A1 decision values are assigned to the roulette form and B1 decision values are assigned to the dice form. The determination values are assigned so that A1 <B1 (A1 + B1 = 100). In addition, when the number of normal symbols is reached, A2 decision values are assigned to the roulette form and B2 decision values are assigned to the dice form so that A2> B2 (A2 + B2 = 100). Is allocated. In this embodiment, when the first predetermined effect is executed in the roulette mode, the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is per ordinary figure as compared to the case where the first predetermined effect is executed in the dice mode. The determination value is assigned so as to increase the expectation that the game ball is controlled so as to easily enter.

  More specifically, in this embodiment, the probability (X1) that the roulette mode is executed when the normal symbol is shifted is, for example, the average probability (XA1 (for example, per normal symbol) that the normal symbol is shifted. The probability (XB1 (in this example, the determination value set in the table of FIG. 73 in this example) that the predetermined effect is executed when the normal symbol is off) Multiply by 10/100 from the number))), and further multiply by A1 / 100 with reference to FIG. In addition, the probability (X2) that the roulette mode is executed per ordinary symbol is, for example, the average probability per ordinary symbol (XA2 (for example, the number of determination values set in the determination table per ordinary symbol). )))), And the probability that a predetermined effect is executed per symbol (XB2 (in this example, 90/100 is obtained from the number of determination values set in the table of FIG. 73)) And further multiplying by A2 / 100 with reference to FIG. 74 (A). Therefore, when the first predetermined effect in the roulette mode appears, the expectation degree (XT1) that the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is controlled to be in a state in which the game ball is likely to enter becomes X2 / (X1 + X2). It is obtained by calculating.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the probability (Y1) that the dice mode is executed when the normal symbol is shifted is, for example, an average probability (XA1) that the normal symbol is shifted, and is predetermined when the normal symbol is shifted. This is obtained by multiplying the probability (XB1 (10/100 in this example)) that the effect is executed, and further multiplying by B1 / 100 with reference to FIG. The probability (Y2) that the dice mode is executed per normal symbol is, for example, the average probability (XA2) per normal symbol, and the probability that a predetermined effect is executed per normal symbol. (XB2 (90/100 in this example)), and further multiplied by B2 / 100 with reference to FIG. Therefore, the expectation degree (YT1) that the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is controlled to be in a state in which the game ball easily enters when the first predetermined effect of the dice appearance appears is Y2 / (Y1 + Y2). It is obtained by calculating.

  In this embodiment, when the first predetermined effect in the roulette manner calculated by the above procedure appears, the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is controlled to be in a state in which the game ball can easily enter the normal symbol. The expectation (XT1) is higher than the expectation (YT1) that the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is controlled to be in a state in which the game ball is likely to enter when the first predetermined effect of the dice appearance appears. The values of the probabilities XA1, XA2, XB1, and XB2 are designed so that the degree of expectation is higher when the first predetermined effect is executed in the roulette mode, and the allocation numbers of A1, A2, B1, and B2 are determined. It has been.

  Note that the allocation of the judgment values shown in FIG. 74 (A) is an example. For example, when it is per normal symbol, the roulette mode is determined at a rate of 100%, or the normal symbol is shifted. May be determined as a dice mode at a rate of 100%. Further, for example, when the first predetermined effect is executed in the dice mode, the variable winning ball apparatus 715 enters the game ball and the game ball enters the normal figure, compared to the case where the first predetermined effect is executed in the roulette mode. The determination value may be assigned so that the expectation for being controlled in an easy state is high.

  In the process of step S759B, the effect control CPU extracts a predetermined effect mode determining random number for determining the mode of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect mode determining random number is one of the determination values corresponding to the predetermined effect mode. When they match, it is determined that the mode of the predetermined effect is the roulette mode or the dice mode. When the normal symbol variation start designation (out of) command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU uses the determination value regarding “ordinary symbol losing” in the first predetermined effect mode determination table, When the variation start designation (hit) command reception flag is set, the determination value related to “per normal symbol” in the first predetermined effect mode determination table is used.

  In step S759B, the effect control CPU determines the effect color of the first predetermined effect using, for example, the first predetermined effect color determination table shown in FIG.

  In the first predetermined effect color determination table shown in FIG. 74 (B), a determination value corresponding to setting the effect color of the first predetermined effect to red and the effect color of the first predetermined effect to blue are supported. The judgment value to be set is set. In FIG. 74B, the number of determination values is shown instead of the determination value itself.

  As shown in FIG. 74B, in this embodiment, when the first predetermined effect is executed, C1 determination values are assigned to the effect color (red) and the effect color (blue) is assigned. Thus, D1 determination values are allocated, and the determination values are allocated such that C1> D1 (C1 + D1 = 100). And, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color, compared to the case where the predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color, The first predetermined effect is executed, and the determination value is assigned such that the ratio of notification whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is controlled to be in a state in which the game ball can easily enter is increased.

  Note that the determination value allocation shown in FIG. 74B is an example. For example, when the first predetermined effect is executed, the effect color may be determined to be red at a rate of 100%. . For example, on the contrary, when the first predetermined effect is executed, the determination value may be assigned so that the ratio that the effect color is determined to be blue is increased.

  In the process of step S759B, the effect control CPU extracts a predetermined effect color determining random number for determining the effect color of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect color determining random number has a determination value corresponding to the effect color of the predetermined effect. If it matches any of these, it is determined that the effect color of the predetermined effect is red or blue.

  In the example shown in FIG. 74, the case where the first predetermined effect mode and the effect color are determined by separate lottery processes using different tables is shown. The processing method to be determined is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. For example, by executing one lottery process using one table in which a combination of the first predetermined effect mode and the effect color is set, the first predetermined effect mode and the effect color are collectively determined. You may make it do.

  Further, the effect control CPU resets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag when executing the process of step S759B. Note that the effect control CPU also resets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag if the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set even if it is determined as “Y” in step S733. In addition, when the CPU for effect control does not shift to the process of step S759B because it is determined as “Y” in steps S752, S753, S754, S757, and S758, the set normal symbol variation start designation command is set. Reset the reception flag.

  In step S761, the CPU for effect control confirms whether or not the variation of the special symbol has been started. Whether or not the change of the special symbol has been started is determined by, for example, the value of the effect control process flag. When the variation of the special symbol has not started, the value of the effect shortening timer (timer for determining the degree of shortening the effect period of the predetermined effect) is incremented by 1 (step S762). When the change of the special symbol is started, the process proceeds to step S771.

  In step S764, the CPU for effect control confirms whether or not it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect. It is determined that the first predetermined effect is executed in the process of step S759A. If it is not decided to execute the first predetermined effect, the process ends.

  When it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect, the effect control CPU checks whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S765). Whether or not the special symbol is changing is determined, for example, based on whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process or the decorative symbol change stopping process. If the special symbol is not changing, the process proceeds to step S770. If the special symbol is changing, the CPU for effect control confirms whether or not the changing pattern is not reachable (step S766). If the variation pattern includes a reach effect, the process proceeds to step S771.

  When the variation pattern is a deviation that does not reach, the effect control CPU sets the remaining time of the variation of the special symbol (for example, the variation time timer set during execution of the variation display of the representation symbol (decoration symbol)). (Specified by the value) is shorter than the normal symbol variation time (for example, 10 seconds: equivalent to a period until the variable winning ball apparatus is controlled so that a game ball can easily enter). Step S767). If not shorter, the process proceeds to step S771. The effect control CPU may confirm whether or not the remaining time of the variation of the special symbol is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) shorter than the variation time of the normal symbol.

  When the remaining time of the change in the special symbol is short, the effect control CPU has a hold memory (at least one of the value of the first hold memory number counter and the value of the second hold memory number counter is not 0). Whether or not (step S768). If there is no pending storage, the process proceeds to step S771.

  If there is an on-hold storage, the effect control CPU sets a next fluctuation flag (step S769).

  In step S770, the effect control CPU sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (in this example, 3 seconds) in the non-change period measurement timer.

  In step S771, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not the next variation flag is set. If the next fluctuation flag is set, a predetermined effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect shortening timer (see steps S741, S761, S762) is selected (step S772). Specifically, the pattern of the predetermined effect is determined as a pattern in which the period obtained by subtracting the value of the effect shortening timer from the period of the predetermined effect shown in FIG. The shortened period is the period of the result notification effect shown in FIG.

  If the next fluctuation flag is not set, the effect control CPU checks whether or not the value of the non-change period measurement timer (see steps S742, S743, and S744) is 0 (step S773). . When the value of the non-change period measurement timer is not 0, the effect control CPU selects a predetermined effect pattern according to the value of the non-change period measurement timer (step S774). Specifically, the pattern of the predetermined effect is determined as a pattern in which the period obtained by subtracting the value of the non-change period measurement timer from the period of the predetermined effect shown in FIG. 61 is the effect period. The shortened period is a period of the result notification effect shown in FIG.

  When the value of the non-change period measurement timer is 0 (the non-change period measurement timer has timed out), the effect control CPU checks whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S775). ). If the special symbol is changing, the CPU for effect control selects a predetermined effect pattern starting from the second period (see FIG. 61) (step S776). When the special symbol is not changing, the CPU for effect control selects a predetermined effect pattern starting from the first period (see FIG. 61) (step S777).

  Next, the effect control CPU sets a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the determined predetermined effect pattern in the first predetermined effect timer (step S778). Then, the CPU for effect control starts the first predetermined effect (step S779) and sets the first predetermined effect executing flag (step S780).

  Note that when the first predetermined effect execution flag is set, information that can specify the notification result of the first predetermined effect is also set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the notification result is “X”, a flag indicating that the notification result is “◯”, and execution of the predetermined effect (◯) after the predetermined effect (×). A flag may be set. For example, when the first predetermined effect execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies which notification result is a predetermined bit of the first predetermined effect execution flag It may be possible to specify which notification result is set by setting.

  In addition, when the first predetermined effect execution flag is set, information that can specify the mode and effect color of the first predetermined effect is also stored in the RAM. As an example, a flag indicating that the aspect of the first predetermined effect is a roulette aspect, a flag indicating that the aspect of the first predetermined effect is red, a flag indicating that the effect color of the first predetermined effect is red, and blue Set the flag. Further, for example, when the first predetermined effect execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), the first predetermined effect mode and the effect color are specified in the predetermined bits of the first predetermined effect execution flag. By setting the value to be performed, the aspect of the first predetermined effect and the effect color may be specified.

  In this embodiment, specifically, the first predetermined effect is realized by executing the effect control according to the data set in the process table (however, the display control of the notification image shown in FIG. 62 is performed). except for). In that case, the CPU for effect control selects the process table corresponding to the determined pattern of the specified effect in the process of step S779, and the effect display device 709 is used using the data set in the selected process table. Starts display control and so on. Each process table is stored in advance in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the second predetermined effect process (step S810B). In the second predetermined effect process, the effect control CPU first checks whether or not a new variation category command (an effect control command indicating a change pattern type prefetch determination result) has been received (step S5201). When a new variation category command is received, the effect control CPU confirms whether or not the first predetermined effect executing flag is set (step S5202). If the first predetermined effect executing flag is not set, the effect control CPU confirms whether or not the second predetermined effect executing flag is set (step S5203). If the second predetermined effect execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU confirms whether or not the second predetermined effect determination flag indicating that the execution of the second predetermined effect is determined is set. (Step S5204).

  If the second predetermined effect determination flag is not set, the effect control CPU confirms whether or not the next variation flag is set (step S5205). If the next fluctuation flag is not set, the effect control CPU confirms whether or not the non-change period measurement timer is operating (not 0) (step S5206).

  When the non-change period measurement timer is not in operation, the effect control CPU confirms whether or not the game state data has a value indicating the high base state (step S5207). If the value indicates a high base state, the process is terminated.

  If the value does not indicate the high base state, the effect control CPU confirms whether or not the big hit gaming state (including the small hit gaming state) is present (step S5208). Whether or not the game state is a big hit gaming state is confirmed, for example, by the value of the effect control process flag. In this case, it is assumed that the effect control CPU is in the big hit gaming state when the value of the effect control process flag is 4 or more. If it is a big hit gaming state, the process is terminated.

  If it is not the big hit gaming state, the CPU for effect control confirms whether or not the variation pattern type indicated by the newly received variation category command indicates a super reach loss or a super reach big hit determination result (step S5209). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the received variation category command indicates a variation pattern type that is out of super reach or a super reach big hit.

  Next, the effect control CPU confirms whether or not the normal symbol variation display is in progress (step S5210a). Whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation display is in progress is confirmed by checking whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation flag that is set based on the reception of the normal symbol fluctuation start designation command is set. This can be determined. If the normal symbol variation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S5212 without proceeding to step S5210b. By executing the process of step S5210a, in this embodiment, the process proceeds to the process after step S5210b only when the normal symbol variation display is also executed, and the second predetermined effect may be executed.

  Next, the CPU for effect control uses the determination result at the time of winning (super-reaching miss or super-reach jackpot) and the total reserved memory number as the second predetermined effect determining table for determining the presence / absence of the second predetermined effect and the notification result. A corresponding predetermined effect determination table is selected (step S5210b).

  Further, the effect control CPU determines the presence / absence of the second predetermined effect and the notification result using the second predetermined effect determination table selected in the process of step S5210b (step S5211a).

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing a second predetermined effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 76, in this embodiment, in the second predetermined effect determination table, a determination value corresponding to not executing the predetermined effect in association with the determination result at the time of winning and the total number of pending storages, and the predetermined effect A determination value corresponding to executing (×), a determination value corresponding to executing a predetermined effect (chance), and a determination value corresponding to executing a predetermined effect (extreme heat) are set. Yes.

  In the process shown in step S5211a, the configuration of the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 33 or 36 shown in the first embodiment is applied, and a predetermined effect (coin) can be determined in addition to the predetermined effect shown in FIG. However, when coins are acquired, it may be configured to be able to notify that there are acquired coins in a predetermined effect.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 76, in this embodiment, in the case of a super reach big hit, compared to a case in which the super reach is lost, a predetermined effect (high heat) with the highest expectation for a specific effect is obtained. While being determined at a high rate, the execution rate of the predetermined effect (severe heat) increases as the total number of reserved storage increases. In this embodiment, as will be described later, in each variable display before the variable display in which the second predetermined effect is executed, the pre-reading notice effect is executed (that is, the error notification result is displayed). Is executed, but the number of pre-reading notice effects is increased by increasing the execution ratio of the predetermined effects (intense heat) as the total number of reserved storage increases. As a result, a sense of expectation for the appearance of a specific effect (in this example, a super reach effect) can be enhanced.

  Next, the CPU for effect control determines the aspect of the second predetermined effect and the effect color (step S5211b). Then, control goes to a step S5212. However, if it is determined in step S5211a that the second predetermined effect is not to be executed, the effect control CPU proceeds to step S5212 as it is without determining the second predetermined effect mode or effect color in step S5211b. To do.

  In step S5211b, the effect control CPU determines, for example, whether the second predetermined effect mode is the roulette mode or the dice mode, using the second predetermined effect mode determination table shown in FIG. .

  In the second predetermined effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 77 (A), the determination value corresponding to the roulette mode and the dice according to each of the case where the super reach is lost and the case where the super reach is a big hit. A determination value corresponding to the mode is set. Note that FIG. 77A shows not the determination value itself but the number of determination values.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (A), in this embodiment, when super reach is lost, A3 decision values are assigned to the roulette aspect and B3 decision values are assigned to the dice aspect. The determination values are assigned so that A3 <B3 (A3 + B3 = 100). Further, in the case of a super reach big hit, A4 decision values are allocated to the roulette mode and B4 determination values are allocated to the dice mode so that A4> B4 (A4 + B4 = 100). Is allocated. In this embodiment, when the second predetermined effect is executed in the roulette mode, the notification result of the second predetermined effect is “Intense” compared to the case where the second predetermined effect is executed in the dice mode. The judgment value is assigned so that the expectation that “heat” is stopped and the super reach big hit is high.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability (X3) that the roulette mode is executed when the super reach is lost is, for example, the average probability (XA3 (for example, jackpot determination table) that the super reach is lost. And the big hit type determination table, the variation pattern type determination table, the number of determinations set in the variation pattern determination table, etc.))) and the average probability that a predetermined effect is executed when the super reach is lost ( It is obtained by multiplying by XB3 (for example, obtained by referring to the number of determinations set in the table of FIG. 76, etc.) and further by multiplying by A3 / 100 with reference to FIG. 77 (A). In addition, the probability (X4) that the roulette mode is executed in the case of a super reach jackpot is, for example, an average probability (XA4 (for example, a jackpot determination table, a jackpot type determination table, a variation pattern type determination) Table), the average probability (XB4 (for example, set in the table of FIG. 76) that a predetermined effect is executed at the time of a super reach big hit) Obtained by referring to the determined number of determinations)), and further multiplying by A4 / 100 with reference to FIG. 77 (A). Therefore, the expectation degree (XT2) for the “reasonable heat” to be stopped and displayed as a super reach big hit when the second predetermined effect in the roulette mode appears is obtained by calculating X4 / (X3 + X4).

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the probability (Y3) that the dice mode is executed when the super reach is deviated is, for example, an average probability (XA3) that the super reach is deviated, and is predetermined when the super reach is deviated. It is obtained by multiplying the average probability (XB3) that the effect is executed, and further multiplying by B3 / 100 with reference to FIG. 77 (A). In addition, the probability (Y4) that the dice mode is executed when the super reach jackpot is reached is, for example, the average probability (XA4) that the super reach jackpot is executed, and the average that the predetermined effect is executed when the super reach jackpot is reached. It is obtained by multiplying by an average probability (XB4) and further multiplying by B4 / 100 with reference to FIG. 77 (A). Therefore, the expectation level (YT2) that “super heat” is stopped and displayed as a super reach big hit when the second predetermined effect of the dice appearance appears can be obtained by calculating Y4 / (Y3 + Y4).

  And in this embodiment, when the second predetermined effect of the roulette aspect calculated by the above procedure appears, the expectation degree (XT2) for “super heat” being stopped and being a super reach big hit, When the second predetermined effect in the roulette mode is executed, which is higher than the expectation level (YT2) that “super heat” is stopped and displayed as a super reach big hit when the second predetermined effect in the dice mode appears. The values of probabilities XA3, XA4, XB3, and XB4 are designed so that the degree of expectation is higher, and the allocation numbers of A3, A4, B3, and B4 are determined.

  Note that the determination value allocation shown in FIG. 77 (A) is an example. For example, when the super reach big hit is determined, the roulette mode is determined at a rate of 100%, or the super reach is shifted. May be determined as a dice mode at a rate of 100%. In addition, for example, when the second predetermined effect is executed in the dice mode, “super heat” is stopped and displayed as a notification result of the second predetermined effect than when the second predetermined effect is executed in the roulette mode. The determination value may be assigned so that the expectation for the super reach big hit becomes high.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, when the super-reach big hit is performed, the ratio of executing the predetermined effect (high heat) is high, whereas when the super-reach is off, the predetermined effect ( In the case where the ratio at which “chance” is executed is high and the second predetermined effect is executed in the form of a dice, the ratio at which “chance” is stopped and displayed as the notification result of the second predetermined effect is increased. However, when the ratio of the predetermined effect (×) is increased when the super reach is lost, and the second predetermined effect is executed in a dice form, “×” is displayed as the notification result of the second predetermined effect. You may comprise so that the ratio of a stop display may become high.

  The effect control CPU extracts a predetermined effect mode determination random number in the process of step S5211b, and when the predetermined effect mode determination random number matches one of the determination values corresponding to the predetermined effect mode, the predetermined effect mode Is determined to be a roulette mode or a dice mode. In addition, when the determination result at the time of winning is out of super reach, the effect control CPU uses the determination value related to “super reach out” in the second predetermined effect mode determination table, and the determination result at winning is the super reach big hit. If it is, the determination value related to “super reach jackpot” in the second predetermined effect mode determination table is used.

  In step S5211b, the effect control CPU determines the effect color of the second predetermined effect using, for example, the second predetermined effect color determination table shown in FIG. 77 (B).

  In the second predetermined effect color determination table shown in FIG. 77 (B), a determination value corresponding to setting the effect color of the second predetermined effect to red and the effect color of the second predetermined effect to blue are supported. The judgment value to be set is set. Note that FIG. 77B shows not the determination value itself but the number of determination values.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (B), in this embodiment, when the second predetermined effect is executed, C2 determination values are assigned to the effect color (red) and the effect color (blue) is assigned. Thus, D2 determination values are allocated, and the determination values are allocated such that C2 <D2 (C2 + D2 = 100). In this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color, the second predetermined effect is executed as compared with the case where the predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of whether or not the reach is a big hit in reach is increased. In addition, as described in FIG. 74 (B), in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color, compared to the case where the predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of the notification of whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter the game is increased by executing the first predetermined effect.

  More specifically, in this embodiment, when the first predetermined effect is executed and the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is informed of whether or not the game ball is controlled to enter easily, a red effect is produced. The probability (S1) that the color is selected is, for example, an average probability (XA1) that the normal symbol is off, or a probability (XB1 (in this example, 10/100) that the predetermined effect is executed when the normal symbol is off. )), And further by multiplying by C1 / 100 with reference to FIG. 74 (B) and an average probability (XA2) per ordinary symbol, a predetermined value per ordinary symbol is determined. This is obtained by multiplying the probability (XB2 (90/100 in this example)) that the effect is executed, and adding the value obtained by multiplying C1 / 100 with reference to FIG. 74 (B). It is done. The probability (T1) that the blue effect color is selected when the first predetermined effect is executed and the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is informed of whether or not the game ball is controlled to enter easily. For example, the average probability (XA1) that the normal symbol is off is multiplied by the probability (XB1 (10/100 in this example)) that the predetermined effect is executed when the normal symbol is off. B), the probability obtained by multiplying D1 / 100 by the average probability (XA2) per ordinary symbol, and the probability (XB2 (real In the example, it is obtained by multiplying by 90/100)) and adding the value obtained by further multiplying by D1 / 100 with reference to FIG. 74 (B).

  Further, in this embodiment, the probability (S2) that the red effect color is selected when the second predetermined effect is executed to notify whether or not the super reach big hit is made is, for example, a difference from the super reach. Is multiplied by the average probability (XB3) that the predetermined effect is executed when the super-reach is off, and further by C2 / 100 with reference to FIG. 77 (B). This value is multiplied by the average probability (XA4) of the super reach jackpot to be multiplied by the average probability (XB4) of executing a predetermined effect at the time of super reach jackpot, and FIG. 77 (B) Is obtained by adding the value obtained by multiplying C2 / 100 with reference to. The probability (T2) that the blue effect color is selected when the second predetermined effect is executed and notification of whether or not the super reach jackpot is made is, for example, the average probability that the super reach is lost. (XA3) is multiplied by an average probability (XB3) that a predetermined effect is executed at the time of super-reaching deviation, and further obtained by multiplying by D2 / 100 with reference to FIG. 77 (B) Then, the average probability (XA4) of the super reach jackpot is multiplied by the average probability (XB4) of executing the predetermined effect at the time of the super reach jackpot, and referring to FIG. 77 (B), D2 / It is obtained by adding the value obtained by multiplying by 100.

  Then, in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color, the probability (ST1) that the first predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color is the probability (ST1) that the first predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color ( S1) / determined by the probability (S1 + S2) that a predetermined effect (first predetermined effect and second predetermined effect) is executed with a red effect color. On the other hand, the probability (TT1) that the first predetermined effect is executed when the predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color is the probability (T1) that the first predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color / blue effect. It is determined by the probability (T1 + T2) that a predetermined effect (first predetermined effect and second predetermined effect) is executed in color. In this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color calculated by the above procedure, the probability (ST1) that the first predetermined effect is executed is the blue effect color. When executed, the first predetermined effect is executed and the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is higher when the predetermined effect is executed with a red effect color than the probability (TT1) that the first predetermined effect is executed. Are set so that the ratio of the notification whether or not the game ball is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter is increased, and the values of the probabilities XA1, XA2, XA3, XA4, XB1, XB2, XB3, and XB4 are designed. , C2, D1, and D2 are determined.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color, the probability (ST2) that the second predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color (ST2) S2) / determined by the probability (S1 + S2) that a predetermined effect (first predetermined effect and second predetermined effect) is executed with a red effect color. On the other hand, the probability (TT2) of executing the second predetermined effect when the predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color is the probability (T2) of executing the second predetermined effect with the blue effect color / blue effect. It is determined by the probability (T1 + T2) that a predetermined effect (first predetermined effect and second predetermined effect) is executed in color. In this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color calculated in the above procedure, the probability (TT2) that the second predetermined effect is executed is the red effect color. When executed, it is higher than the probability (ST2) that the second predetermined effect is executed, and when the predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color, the second predetermined effect is executed and the super reach big hit is achieved. The values of the probabilities XA1, XA2, XA3, XA4, XB1, XB2, XB3, and XB4 are designed so that the ratio of whether or not notification is performed is high, and the allocation numbers of C1, C2, D1, and D2 are determined. ing.

  Note that the determination value allocation shown in FIG. 77B is an example. For example, when the second predetermined effect is executed, the effect color may be determined to be blue at a rate of 100%. . For example, on the contrary, when the second predetermined effect is executed, the determination value may be assigned so that the ratio that the effect color is determined to be red is increased.

  The effect control CPU extracts a predetermined effect color determination random number (see FIG. 42) in the process of step S5211b, and the predetermined effect color determination random number matches one of the determination values corresponding to the effect color of the predetermined effect. In addition, it is determined that the effect color of the predetermined effect is red or blue.

  In the example shown in FIG. 77, the case where the second predetermined effect mode and the effect color are determined by separate lottery processes using different tables is shown. The processing method to be determined is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. For example, by executing one lottery process using one table in which a combination of the second predetermined effect mode and the effect color is set, the second predetermined effect mode and the effect color are collectively determined. You may make it do.

  Next, the effect control CPU executes a pre-reading notice determination process for determining the presence / absence and mode of the pre-reading notice effect (step S5212).

  If the CPU for effect control determines to execute the second predetermined effect, it sets a second predetermined effect determination flag (steps S5213 and S5214).

  When the second predetermined effect determination flag is set, information that can specify the notification result of the second predetermined effect is also stored in the RAM. As an example, a flag indicating that the notification result is “x”, a flag indicating that the notification result is “chance”, and a flag indicating that the notification result is “hot” are set. Also, for example, when the second predetermined effect determination flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies which notification result is set in the predetermined bit of the second predetermined effect determination flag. By doing so, it may be possible to specify which notification result is given.

  Further, when the second predetermined effect determination flag is set, information that can specify the aspect and effect color of the second predetermined effect is also stored in the RAM. As an example, a flag indicating that the mode of the second predetermined effect is a roulette mode, a flag indicating that it is a dice mode, a flag indicating that the color of the second predetermined effect is red, and blue Set the flag. In addition, for example, when the second predetermined effect determination flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies the aspect of the second predetermined effect and the effect color in the predetermined bits of the second predetermined effect determination flag By setting, it may be possible to specify the aspect and effect color of the second predetermined effect.

  Next, the effect control CPU sets the total pending storage number in the first variation counter (step S5215). Note that the first variation number counter is a counter for counting the number of variation displays executed until the variation display including the second predetermined effect is started. In this embodiment, when the execution of the second predetermined effect is determined during the variation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the first variation counter is set in step S5215, the execution is first performed. At the end of the middle variation display, the value of the first variation number counter is decremented by 1 (see step S8312). As a result, the first variation number counter counts up to the variation display immediately before the variation display including the second predetermined effect. The value becomes 0. In step S5215, when the variation display of the special symbol or the decoration symbol is not being displayed, the effect control CPU sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current total number of pending storages in the first variation counter. Is desirable. With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure that the value of the first variation counter becomes 0 until the variation display immediately before the variation display including the second predetermined effect.

  Thereafter, each time the decorative symbol variation display is executed, the value of the first variation number counter is decremented by one. Then, when the value of the first variation number counter becomes 0, the second predetermined effect is executed in the next variation display of the decorative design, and the second predetermined effect execution flag is set.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, by applying the configuration shown in the first embodiment to the pachinko gaming machine 700, the game-related information is output in the same manner as in the first embodiment. If the setting is made, the rate at which the privilege is advantageously given and the notification that the privilege is given by the suggestion effect is also increased, so the player who is making the setting for outputting game-related information On the other hand, it is possible to improve the interest related to the granting of benefits.

  In this embodiment, in the suggestion effect (predetermined effect in this example), the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled as an advantageous game state so that the game ball can easily enter, or it becomes super reach. Although the case of notifying that a super reach jackpot has been shown is shown, the advantageous gaming state notified in the suggestion effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, it may be configured to be able to notify the suggestion effect that the advantageous gaming state is a big hit, a probability variation state, a short time state, or a high base state. In addition, for example, it may be configured so that it is possible to notify in the suggestion that the player has suddenly won a promising big hit or small hit. Furthermore, for example, the notification may be made in the suggestion effect that the pseudo-ream occurs.

  As described above, the contents of the first embodiment can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 700. Similarly, the contents of the second embodiment can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 700.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention.

[Modification]
Note that a gaming system, a gaming machine, and a management device can be configured by variously combining the configurations described in Embodiment 1 above. FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination pattern of configurations in the gaming system.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the gaming system shown in the first embodiment, (1) the gaming machine outputs a two-dimensional code, and (2) the gaming machine gives a coin (either gold, silver, or copper). , (5) The server determines the item, and (6) The server grants the item, and includes four components.

  In addition to the combination patterns of the constituent elements (1) to (6) shown in FIG. 78, those shown in FIG. 78 may be the first modification and the second modification shown in FIG. For example, the gaming system shown in Modification 1 includes four components (1), (2), (4), and (6) among the components (1) to (6). The gaming system shown in the modification 2 includes four components (1), (3), (5), and (6) among the components (1) to (6).

  Note that each component of the gaming system shown in the first embodiment is a configuration that should have at least a configuration that outputs a two-dimensional code on the slot machine 1 side, and a configuration that gives an item on the management server 1200 side. Except for the configuration to be provided, it may be provided on either the slot machine 1 side or the management server 1200 side.

  In addition, said each embodiment includes the invention shown to the following (1)-(8), and there exists an effect which is demonstrated below.

  (1) The gaming system according to the first aspect enables a predetermined game using a game value (for example, a medal or a game ball) by a player and a player's game result (for example, the total number of games) , BB, RB times, level, experience value, game setting information that can be output in a predetermined manner (for example, two-dimensional code) information including game result information (for example, slot machine 1 or pachinko game machine) ) And a management device (for example, management server 1200) that manages game information (for example, information shown in FIG. 21 (a)) relating to a game about the gaming machine for each registered player. (For example, a gaming system 1001), in which the management device updates game information based on game result information and a corresponding player based on the game information. A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege (for example, data indicating content data or a voucher), and key data (for example, a password) generated based on game information corresponding to the player in response to the player's request A key data issuing means for issuing a key data receiving means for receiving input of key data from the player, and information including game result information in accordance with a predetermined end operation by the player A gaming result output means that outputs the total amount of gaming value used by the player from the total amount of gaming value acquired by the player during the period from the receipt of key data to the end operation. A difference specifying means for specifying a difference value for gaming (for example, a medal difference number or a gaming ball difference number), which is a subtracted value, is provided, and the gaming value difference amount is determined by the player. If it is determined whether the result is favorable or unfavorable, and if it is determined that the result is unfavorable, the condition for granting the benefit is more than the case where it is determined that the result is advantageous. It is set so as to be advantageous to the user.

  According to such a configuration, when a game is terminated with a game result unfavorable for the player, conditions for granting a privilege are set so as to be more advantageous for the player. For this reason, even if the player loses the game, the player can actively output the game result information and maintain the willingness to receive the privilege from the management device. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation where the player leaves without outputting the game result information after the game is finished, and as a result, it is expected to promote the utilization of services provided by the game system.

  The determination of whether the game result is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player is based on the game value difference amount, but the determination criterion is an arbitrary design item. For example, ± 0 may be used as a reference, or a predetermined amount on the minus side or a predetermined amount on the plus side may be used as a reference. Further, the conditions for granting a privilege are not limited to two cases where the game result is advantageous to the player and disadvantageous, but may be changed in multiple stages depending on the degree of advantage and the degree of disadvantage. It may be. For example, when the game value is a medal and the game value difference amount is a difference number of medals, the condition is set to be most advantageous when it is −1001 or less, and thereafter −1000 to −500. Each time the number of medals is increased, such as -500 to 0, 0 to 500, 500 to 1000, 1001 or more, the condition for granting the privilege may be set to be disadvantageous. .

  Further, the difference specifying means may be configured to be provided in at least one of the gaming machine or the management device. In addition, it is determined whether the difference value for gaming is an advantageous result or an unfavorable result for the player, and when it is determined that the advantageous value result is unfavorable, it is more than when it is determined that the advantageous value difference is indicated. In addition, it may be either a gaming machine or a management device that sets the conditions for granting a privilege to be advantageous to the player.

(2) In the gaming system of the above (1), the difference specifying means is included in the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is a value for benefit indicating an exchange value (for example, coin) when receiving a privilege from the management device. Benefit value data storage means for storing data (for example, stock coin data) (for example, stock coin storage area allocated to the RAM 91b) and benefits stored in the benefit value data storage means in accordance with the end operation The exchange value that can be obtained by the player is determined based on the exchange value indicated by the use value data. At that time, it is judged whether the difference value for the game is advantageous or unfavorable for the player, and the unfavorable result is shown. An acquisition determination means for determining to increase the rate at which more exchange value can be acquired than when it is determined to be an advantageous result when determined to be The game result output means outputs information including game result information including privilege value data (for example, acquisition data) indicating the exchange value determined by the acquisition determination means in a predetermined manner. Good.

  According to such a configuration, on the gaming machine side, when a game is terminated with a game result unfavorable to the player, a condition for granting a privilege by increasing the ratio at which a lot of exchange value can be obtained. Is set to be more advantageous for the player side. Thereby, the management apparatus side can determine easily the provision of the privilege to a player based on the exchange value which the said player acquired included in the game information corresponding to the said player.

(3) In the gaming system of (2) above, the gaming machine may further include suggestion effect means for executing an suggestion effect that suggests whether or not exchange value can be acquired.

  According to such a configuration, the player's gambling feeling is enshrined, and the interest can be improved. As an example of the suggestive effect in this case, as shown in FIG. 20, in the JACKPOT (jackpot), it is exchanged depending on whether or not the same number (for example, 7) is arranged in a plurality of digits (for example, 3 digits). For example, the production suggests whether or not value can be acquired. At that time, the expected degree of acquisition may be indicated by, for example, display of a background or character, output of sound or sound effect, and the like.

(4) In the gaming system of the above (2) or (3), in the gaming machine, the acquisition determining means determines an exchange value that can be acquired by the player through a predetermined lottery process. When it is determined that the result is unfavorable for the player, the winning probability may be higher than when it is determined that the result is advantageous.

  According to such a configuration, gambling with respect to the player's acquisition of exchange value is emphasized, and interest can be improved.

(5) In the gaming system of (1), the difference specifying means is included in the gaming machine, and in the gaming machine, the game result output means includes a game including the game value difference amount specified by the difference specifying means. Information including result information is output in a predetermined manner, and in the management device, the game information managed for each registered player shows the exchange value at the time of receiving the provision of the privilege acquired by the player The management device determines the exchange value that can be acquired by the player based on the game result information, and the management device uses the bonus value included in the game information corresponding to the player based on the determined exchange value. When the value data is updated and the game value difference amount included in the game result information is determined to be an advantageous result or an unfavorable result for the player at the time of determination, and is determined to indicate an unfavorable result It may further comprise an acquisition decision means for deciding to increase the rate to earn a lot of exchange value than when it is determined that shows a favorable result.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine side does not need to perform processing related to privilege value data, and thus does not have a complicated function.

(6) In the gaming system of (5) above, in the management device, the acquisition determining means determines an exchange value that can be acquired by the player by a predetermined lottery process, and in the lottery, the difference in game value is disadvantageous for the player. The winning probability may be higher when it is determined that a favorable result is indicated than when it is determined that an advantageous result is indicated.

  According to such a configuration, gambling with respect to the player's acquisition of exchange value is emphasized, and interest can be improved.

(7) The gaming machine according to the second aspect is a gaming machine (for example, a slot machine 1 or a pachinko gaming machine) that enables a predetermined game using a gaming value (for example, a medal or a gaming ball) by the player. The player receives input of key data (for example, a password) issued from a management device (for example, management server 1200) that gives a player a predetermined privilege (for example, data indicating content data or a voucher). Information relating to the key data accepting means and the player's game result (for example, total number of games, number of BBs, RBs, level, experience value, production setting and achievement mission), and an end operation after accepting the key data Game value difference amount (for example, medal difference) that is a value obtained by subtracting the total amount of game value used by the player from the total amount of game value acquired by the player in the period until This is advantageous when it is determined that the identified game value difference amount is an advantageous result or an unfavorable result for the player and indicates an unfavorable result. Information including game result information for setting a condition for giving a privilege to the player side more favorably than the case where it is determined to indicate the result is determined according to the end operation. Game result output means for outputting in a mode (for example, a two-dimensional code).

  According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the same effects as the gaming system of (1) above can be achieved.

(8) A management device according to the third aspect of the present invention provides a predetermined gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1) that enables a predetermined game using a game value (for example, a medal or a game ball) by a player. And a pachinko gaming machine), which is a management device (for example, management server 1200) that manages game information related to the game for each registered player, and a game related to a player's game result output from the gaming machine Game information updating means for updating game information based on the result information, privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege (for example, data indicating content data or a voucher) to the corresponding player based on the game information, and game Key data issuing means for issuing key data (for example, a password) generated based on game information corresponding to the player in response to a player's request, Can specify a difference value for a game value (for example, a medal difference number or a game ball difference number) that is a value obtained by subtracting the total amount of game value used by the player from the total amount of game value acquired by the player If the game value difference amount is determined to be an advantageous result or an unfavorable result for a player, and if it is determined to indicate an unfavorable result, an advantageous result is indicated It is characterized in that the condition for giving a privilege is set to be advantageous to the player side than when it is determined that the player is.

  According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the same effects as the gaming system of (1) above can be achieved.

  The invention described in each of the above embodiments can be applied to a gaming machine or a gaming system configured as follows.

  (1) A gaming machine is a gaming machine (slot machine 1 / pachinko gaming machine 1001) capable of performing a predetermined game, and inputs player information (password) related to the player. Means (operating unit / effect switch 56 such as a push button or stick controller of a pachinko gaming machine, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) and player information input means (effect switch 56, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R / Player value setting means (sub-control unit 91 / pachinko game) for setting player value (points) according to player information (password) input with the operation unit such as a push button or a stick controller of a pachinko gaming machine) Machine control CPU) and game history (200 games per game / 100 rotations) as a result of the game played by the player Bonus granting means (sub-control unit 91 / pachinko gaming machine control CPU) for granting a bonus (coin) based on each bonus), and bonus granting means (sub-control unit 91 / pachinko gaming machine production) When the player value (points) set by the player value setting means (sub control unit 91 / pachinko gaming machine effect control CPU) is consumed, the control CPU) uses the player value (points). It is characterized in that a privilege (coin) is given under a preferential condition as compared with the case where it is not consumed.

  According to this feature, when the player value set according to the player information input by the player information input means is consumed, the condition is more favorable than the case where the player value is not consumed. It is possible to receive benefits. That is, since the preferential degree at the time of granting a privilege changes depending on the presence or absence of the player value, it is possible to effectively enhance the interest at the time of receiving the grant of the privilege.

  Note that the player information related to the player may be information that can identify the player, information such as a game history that the player has played in the past, and personal information to the player. It may be information that can specify the value assigned to the information.

  In addition, when the privilege granting means consumes the player value, the privilege is granted under a preferential condition as compared with the case where the player value is not consumed than when the player value is not consumed. May give a privilege with a high probability, give a privilege with a higher value than when the player value is not consumed, or have a high probability of being given a privilege with a high value, or It may be preferentially combined.

  (2) The gaming machine of (1) has a player value setting means (sub-control unit 91 / pachinko gaming machine effect control CPU) when a predetermined increase condition (every 300 games / 100 rotations) is satisfied. ) Is provided with a player value increasing means (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of a pachinko gaming machine) for increasing the player value (points) set by (1). According to this feature, even if the player value is consumed, the player value is increased by satisfying a predetermined increase condition thereafter, and it is possible to receive a privilege under the preferential condition again. Become.

  (3) The gaming machine described in (1) is characterized in that the predetermined increase condition is that the game history satisfies a specific condition (every 300 games / 100 rotations). According to this feature, since the player value is increased by playing a game, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

  (4) Does the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) consume the player value (points) set by the player value setting means (sub control unit 91 / effect control CPU 1101)? The player is provided with selection means (effect switch 56) for selecting whether or not, and the privilege grant means (sub control unit 91 / pachinko machine effect control CPU) is selected by the selection means (effect switch 56 / pachinko machine). In the case where it is selected that the player value (points) is consumed by an operation unit such as a push button, a privilege (coins) is given under a preferential condition. According to this feature, the player can arbitrarily select whether or not to consume the player value in order to apply the preferential condition when the player receives the privilege.

  (5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), the remaining player value specifying information (two-dimensional code for specifying points) that can specify the remaining player value (points) at the end of the game ) To output the remaining player value specification information (sub control unit 91 / pachinko gaming machine effect control CPU). According to this feature, it is possible to consume one player value across a plurality of gaming machines and apply preferential conditions when receiving a privilege.

  (6) The gaming system is a gaming machine (slot machine 1 / pachinko gaming machine) capable of performing a predetermined game, and player information input means for inputting player information (password) related to the player (Operation switch 56, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R / operating unit such as a push button or a stick controller of a pachinko machine) and player information input means (production switch 56, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R / pachinko Player value setting means (sub-control unit 91 / pachinko gaming machine) for setting player value (points) according to player information (password) input by an operation unit such as a push button or a stick controller of a gaming machine) And a game history (results of 200 games consumed / 100 rotations erased) as a result of the player playing the game. Privilege right granting means (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of a pachinko gaming machine) for granting a privilege right (right to receive coin grant) based on Benefit right specifying information (a right to receive a coin is specified) that can specify a privilege right (a right to receive a coin) granted by a right grant means (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of a pachinko machine) Bonus right specifying information output means (sub-control unit 91 / pachinko gaming machine effect control CPU) for outputting a gaming machine (slot machine 1 / pachinko gaming machine) and bonus right specifying information Benefit right specifying information (two-dimensional specifying the right to receive coins) output by the output means (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of the pachinko machine) A privilege granting means for granting a privilege (coin) based on a privilege right (right to receive the grant of coins) identified from the bonus card), and a privilege right granting means (sub-control unit 91 / pachinko machine effect) The control CPU) consumes the player value (points) by consuming the player value (points) set by the player value setting means (sub control unit 91 / pachinko machine effect control CPU). It is characterized by granting a privilege right (right to receive coins) under conditions that are more preferential than if not.

  According to this feature, when the player value set in accordance with the player information input by the player information input means is consumed, it is more preferential than when the player value (points) is not consumed. It is possible to receive a privilege right for receiving a privilege under the conditions. That is, since the preferential degree at the time of granting the privilege right varies depending on the presence or absence of the player value, it is possible to effectively enhance the interest when receiving the privilege right.

  Note that the player information related to the player may be information that can identify the player, information such as a game history that the player has played in the past, and personal information to the player. It may be information that can specify the value assigned to the information.

  In addition, when the privilege right granting means consumes the player value, granting the privilege right under a preferential condition than when the player value is not consumed does not consume the player value. A privilege right may be granted with a higher probability than the case, or a privilege right (such as a privilege right to obtain a high value privilege) that is more valuable than when the player value is not consumed, A thing with a high probability of giving a privilege privilege with high value, or a thing preferentially combining these may be used.

  Further, the privilege right specific information output means may be configured to output the privilege right specific information by displaying character data, or by displaying data encoded such as a barcode or a two-dimensional code, The configuration may be such that the privilege right specifying information is output, or the privilege right specifying information may be output by outputting the privilege right specifying information so as to be readable from the outside by wired connection, wireless connection, infrared connection, or the like.

  (7) In the gaming system according to (6), the gaming machine (slot machine 1 / pachinko gaming machine) sets the player value when a predetermined increase condition (every 300 games / 100 revolutions) is satisfied. A player value increasing means (sub control unit 91 / pachinko gaming machine effect control CPU) for increasing the player value (point) set by the means (sub control unit 91 / pachinko gaming machine effect control CPU). It is characterized by providing. According to this feature, even if the player value is consumed, the player value is increased by satisfying a predetermined increase condition thereafter, and it is possible to receive a privilege right again under preferential conditions. It becomes.

  (8) The gaming system according to (6) is characterized in that the predetermined increase condition is that the game history satisfies a specific condition (100 rotation digestion / 300 game digestion). According to this feature, the player value (points) is increased by playing the game, so that the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

  (9) In the gaming system according to any one of (6) to (8), the gaming machine (slot machine 1 / pachinko gaming machine) is a player value setting means (sub-control unit 91 / pachinko gaming machine effect control). And a selection means (effect switch 56) for the player to select whether or not the player value (points) set by the CPU is consumed, and a privilege right granting means (sub control unit 91 / pachinko gaming machine) When the selection means (effect switch 56 / push button 1120) is selected to consume the player value (points), the effect control CPU) grants a privilege right (giving a coin) under preferential conditions. The right to receive). According to this feature, the player can arbitrarily select whether or not to consume the player value in order to apply the preferential condition when the player receives the privilege.

  (10) In the gaming system according to any one of (6) to (9), the gaming machine (slot machine 1 / pachinko gaming machine) is a remaining game that can specify the remaining player value (points) at the end of the game. The game apparatus (management server 1200) includes a remaining player value specification information output means (sub control unit 91 / pachinko machine effect control CPU) for outputting player value specification information (two-dimensional code for specifying points). ) Includes player information issuing means for issuing player information (password) based on the player value (point) specified from the remaining player value specifying information (two-dimensional code in which points are specified). It is a feature. According to this feature, it is possible to consume one player value across a plurality of gaming machines and apply preferential conditions when receiving a privilege right.

  (11) In the gaming system according to any one of (6) to (10), the privilege right specifying information output means (sub control unit 91 / pachinko gaming machine directing control CPU) receives the privilege right as privilege right specifying information. A two-dimensional code (two-dimensional code specifying the right to receive coins) that can specify (right to receive coins) is output, and the privilege granting means has a two-dimensional code (right to receive coins). It is characterized in that a privilege (coin) is granted based on a privilege right (right to receive the grant of coins) specified by reading a specified two-dimensional code). According to this feature, a player can receive a privilege simply by reading a two-dimensional code as privilege right specifying information.

  Specifically, the gaming machines (1) to (5) and the gaming systems (6) to (11) can be implemented as follows.

  The sub-control unit 91 selects a coin of gold, silver, or bronze when giving a coin when winning a bonus or winning a cherry, but the number of points in the point storage area remains. In this case, guidance indicating that the selection rate of coins is favored by using points and options of 0 to 3 as consumption points are displayed. At this time, the production switch 56 and the stop switch 8L are displayed. , 8C, 8R to select one of 1 to 3 points, the number of selected points is subtracted from the number of points in the point storage area, and the coin selection rate is preferentially selected according to the number of selected points It has come to be.

  Specifically, as shown in Fig. 79 (a), when 0 points are selected (when points are not used), gold is 15%, silver is 15%, and copper is 75%. If 1 point is selected, gold is 20%, silver is 20%, and copper is 60%, and if 2 points are selected, gold is 25% and silver is 30%. When copper is won at a rate of 45% and 3 points are selected, gold is won with a probability of 30%, silver is 40%, and copper is 30%.

  In this way, when coins are awarded, the coin selection rate is given preferential treatment according to the number of points consumed, and the more points that are consumed, the better the color of the coin (copper → gold or (Silver, silver → gold) is given higher probability.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 performs a stock coin acquisition lottery at the end of the game and determines whether or not the stock coin can be acquired, but when the number of points in the point storage area remains, By using the points, guidance that the winning probability of the stock coin acquisition lottery is preferentially displayed and options of 0 to 3 as consumption points are displayed. At this time, the production switch 56 and the stop switch 8L , 8C, 8R to select one of 1 to 3 points, the number of selected points is subtracted from the number of points in the point storage area, and the stock coin winning lottery is won according to the selected number of points. Probability is preferential.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), when 0 point is selected (when no points are used), when the difference number is negative, the difference is 0.75%, and when the difference number is positive. If you select 1 point, you will win 3% if the difference is negative and 2% if the difference is positive, then select 2 points. If the difference is negative, the winner is 7.5%. If the difference is positive, the winner is 5%. If 3 points are selected, the difference is negative. Win 15% and 10% if the difference is positive.

  Thus, when the stock coin acquisition lottery is performed, the winning probability is preferentially set according to the number of points consumed, and the winning probability increases as the number of points consumed increases.

  In this embodiment, it is determined that information useful for a player consumes more points, and even if the number of remaining points is the same, useful information can be obtained according to the value of the information. The number of times will be different.

  The sub-control unit 91 adds the number of points stored in the point storage area by the number corresponding to the established condition when the predetermined recovery condition is established. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80, after entering the password, every time 300 games are consumed, the number of points in the point storage area is incremented by 1, and a rare effect (in this example, an effect with an appearance rate of 1/2000 or less) ) Is executed, 2 is added to the number of points in the point storage area. Further, the points may be added not only at the gaming machine side but also at the management server 1200. In this embodiment, the number of points managed by the management server 1200 is incremented by 3 every time the date is changed. Will be.

  (1) As described above, in each of the above-described embodiments, information output means capable of outputting specific information encoded so as to include predetermined information (for example, a part for performing the processing of S2207 in FIG. 24) And detection means (for example, a part for performing the processing of S2204 in FIG. 24) for detecting whether or not the object (for example, the portable terminal 1100) is in a specific region (for example, in front of the liquid crystal display 51). The information output means outputs the specific information on the condition that the detection object is detected by the detection means when an information output condition permitting the output of the specific information (for example, input of a password) is satisfied. (For example, when it is determined “YES” in the determination process of S2204 in FIG. 24, the process of S2207 is performed to perform the process of S2707 in FIG. 30). Therefore, the troublesomeness felt by the player when outputting the specific information can be eliminated.

  In each of the above embodiments, an example in which the main menu screen is displayed when the mobile terminal 1100 is detected has been described. However, for example, a game machine that directly outputs a two-dimensional code when a detection target is detected is described above. The invention according to the claims can be realized by applying the configuration shown in the embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the main menu screen is taken as an example of the specific information. However, for example, a game machine that displays specific information different from the above embodiment, such as a two-dimensional code or a barcode, may The invention according to the claims can be realized by applying the configuration shown in the embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the mobile terminal 1100 is taken as an example of the detection target. However, for example, a detection target that is different from the above embodiment, such as a part of the player's body such as a player's hand, is used. The invention according to the claims can be realized by applying the configuration described in the above embodiment to the gaming machine to be detected.

  In each of the above embodiments, the password input is given as an example of the information output condition. For example, the period from the end of the game to the setting of the bet number, the bonus is being set, the jackpot is being set, etc. The invention according to the claims can be realized by applying the configuration shown in the above embodiment to a gaming machine in which information output conditions different from those in the above embodiment are set.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the specific area is in front of the liquid crystal display 51, a position where the light receiving element 57b can receive reflected light from the mobile terminal 1100, and a position where the mobile terminal 1100 can acquire a two-dimensional code. In the above embodiment, for example, a gaming machine having a specific area different from the above embodiment, such as setting a specific area obliquely below or above the liquid crystal display 51, is shown. By applying the configuration, the invention according to claim 1 can be realized.

  In each of the above embodiments, the example in which the mobile terminal 1100 is detected by the photoelectric sensor 57 has been described. However, for example, the above-described embodiment is applied to a gaming machine using a sensor different from the above embodiment, such as an infrared sensor or a magnetic sensor. The invention according to the claims can be realized by applying the configuration shown in the embodiment.

  (2) In each of the above embodiments, the information output means outputs the specific information to a predetermined area (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display 51), and the specific area is specified by the information output means. (For example, in front of the liquid crystal display 51 and at a position where the light receiving element 57b can receive the reflected light from the portable terminal 1100, a two-dimensional code can be acquired by the portable terminal 1100). position). Therefore, since the specific information is output simply by performing the operation for acquiring the specific information at a position close to the predetermined area, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance felt by the player when outputting the specific information. .

  (3) In each of the above embodiments, the detection means detects a player's action when the information output condition is not satisfied, and executes a special effect according to the detection result ( For example, it is provided with a portion that performs the process of S4104 of FIG. 32 when it is determined “NO” in the process of S4103 of FIG. According to such a configuration, the detection for executing the special effect and the detection for outputting the specific information can be combined, so that the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. Moreover, the interest of the production can be enhanced by executing the special production. Furthermore, the troublesomeness felt by the player when outputting the specific information can be eliminated.

  In each of the above embodiments, the photoelectric sensor 57 is disposed in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display 51. However, for example, the photoelectric sensor 57 is disposed in the vicinity of the transparent window 3 of the front door 1b. 57 may be arranged to detect the player's movement.

  (4) Moreover, in each said embodiment, you may make it provide the alerting | reporting means (For example, the part which performs the process of S2206 of FIG. 24) which alert | reports that the detection means detected the target object. According to such a configuration, since the player can confirm that the specific information has been output, the specific information can be acquired with certainty.

  In each of the above embodiments, an example is given in which notification is performed using the liquid crystal display 51. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the speakers 53 and 54 are disposed on the back side (inside) of the reel. A back lamp (reel LED 55 in the above embodiment), a transmissive liquid crystal display (a liquid crystal display configured so that the reel can be seen) disposed on the front side of the reel, a lamp attached to the front door 1b, etc. The configuration shown in the above embodiment is applied to a slot machine that performs notification by means different from the above embodiment, such as LED, vibration of the stop switch, ventilation from the periphery of the stop switch, change in temperature of the stop switch, etc. Thus, the claimed invention can be realized. The notification may be performed using a part of a device having other functions (for example, when notification is performed using the reel LED 55, the reel LED 55 has a function of illuminating the reel from the back side). An apparatus that performs only notification may be provided.

  (5) In each of the above embodiments, the detection means specifies the type of the object (for example, the part that performs the process of S2205 in FIG. 24), and the information output means indicates that the detection object is of the specific type. Specific information is output in the case (for example, a portion that enables the processing of S2207 to be performed in S2707 of FIG. 30 when it is determined “YES” in the determination processing of S2205 of FIG. 24). . According to such a configuration, it can be surely recognized whether or not specific information should be output.

  In each of the above embodiments, the type of the object is specified by the amount of received light reflected by the light receiving element 57b of the photoelectric sensor 57. For example, the illuminance of the reflected light received by the illuminance sensor or the image taken by the camera. The invention according to the claims is realized by applying the configuration described in the above embodiment to a gaming machine that detects the object by a method different from the above embodiment, such as specifying the type of the object by analyzing Is possible.

  (6) Moreover, in each said embodiment, the right provision means to provide the right (for example, coin) which provides either of the types of privilege (for example, item A or item B) according to a game history. (For example, the part which performs the processing of S2604 to S2607 in FIG. 28 and performs the processing of S2611) and the privilege determining means for determining the privilege to be granted based on the right granted by the right granting means (for example, S3703 in FIG. 47) And the determination processing of S3713 and the processing of S3710), and when the special effect set by the player is set as the effect executed by the gaming machine, the privilege determining means As compared with the case where no is set, it is determined to give a privilege of a type related to the specific effect as a privilege at a high rate (for example, FIG. 47). A judgment process of S 3704, the portion for processing S3709 performs processing of S3708). Therefore, since the privilege of the kind related to the set specific effect is easily given, the privilege that the player likes can be given, and the player can feel the pleasure of giving the privilege. Moreover, since the willingness to play a game by setting a specific effect can be increased, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the item is given as an example as a privilege. For example, the execution of the setting suggestion effect, the increase of the effect type, the transition to the state where the premium effect is likely to appear, the wallpaper or music of the mobile terminal The invention according to the claims can be realized by applying the configuration shown in the above-described embodiment to a slot machine in which advantageous rights different from those in the above-described embodiment are set, such as granting of the above.

  In each of the above embodiments, the item A or the item B is given as an example as a privilege. For example, when the character A is set as a specific effect, the voice, wallpaper, and character B on the portable terminal for the character A are displayed. The invention according to the claims in which a plurality of types of benefits are set in the set category with the specific effects as a category, such as a voice or wallpaper on the mobile terminal for the character B when the specified effect is set. It is possible to realize.

  (7) In each of the above-described embodiments, a right granting unit (for example, FIG. 28) that grants a right to grant any of a plurality of types of benefits (for example, item A or item B) according to the game history. And a privilege determination unit that determines a privilege to be granted based on the right granted by the right granting unit (for example, determination processing in S3703 and S3713 in FIG. 47) And a portion for performing the process of S3710), and a privilege type selection means (for example, a portion for performing the processing of S3706 and S3715 in FIG. 47) for allowing the player to arbitrarily select the type of privilege desired. The privilege determining means uses the privilege type selecting means when the game frequency is higher than the predetermined frequency compared to when the game frequency is not higher than the predetermined frequency. Player decides to grant the kind of benefits that is selected in a high percentage (e.g., a determination process in S3705 in FIG. 47, the portion for processing S3709 performs processing of S3708). Therefore, since the privilege that the player likes is given according to the frequency of the game, the player's willingness to play the game can be increased, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, the item is given as an example as a privilege. For example, the execution of the setting suggestion effect, the increase of the effect type, the transition to the state where the premium effect is likely to appear, the wallpaper of the mobile terminal or the music The invention according to the claims can be realized by applying the configuration described in the above embodiment to a slot machine in which advantageous rights different from those in the above embodiment are set, such as granting.

  In each of the above embodiments, the item A or the item B is given as an example as a privilege. For example, when the character A is set as a specific effect, the voice, wallpaper, and character B on the portable terminal for the character A are displayed. The invention according to the claims in which a plurality of types of benefits are set in the set category with the specific effects as a category, such as a voice or wallpaper on the mobile terminal for the character B when the specified effect is set. It is possible to realize.

(8) Further, in each of the above embodiments, as the right to grant a privilege, the first right (for example, silver coin or copper coin) and the type of right related to the specific effect set by the player are granted. The second right (for example, gold coin) having a high ratio is set, and notification means (for example, the part for performing the processing of S2613 in FIG. 29) for notifying that the second right has been obtained is provided.
Therefore, since the player can identify that the privilege that he / she likes is given, the player's willingness to play the game again can be increased, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, an example is given in which notification is performed using the liquid crystal display 51. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the speakers 53 and 54 are disposed on the back side (inside) of the reel. A back lamp (reel LED 55 in the above embodiment), a transmissive liquid crystal display (a liquid crystal display configured so that the reel can be seen) disposed on the front side of the reel, a lamp attached to the front door 1b, etc. The configuration shown in the above embodiment is applied to a slot machine that performs notification by means different from the above embodiment, such as LED, vibration of the stop switch, ventilation from the periphery of the stop switch, change in temperature of the stop switch, etc. Thus, the claimed invention can be realized. The notification may be performed using a part of a device having other functions (for example, when notification is performed using the reel LED 55, the reel LED 55 has a function of illuminating the reel from the back side). An apparatus that performs only notification may be provided.

(9) Further, in each of the above embodiments, as a right to grant a privilege, there are a first right (for example, silver coin or copper coin) and a type of right that is set in hope that a player is granted. A second right (for example, a gold coin) having a high ratio to be granted is set, and notification means (for example, a part for performing the processing of S2613 in FIG. 29) for notifying that the second right has been obtained is provided.
Therefore, since the player can identify that the privilege that he / she likes is given, the player's willingness to play the game again can be increased, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, an example is given in which notification is performed using the liquid crystal display 51. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the speakers 53 and 54 are disposed on the back side (inside) of the reel. A back lamp (reel LED 55 in the above embodiment), a transmissive liquid crystal display (a liquid crystal display configured so that the reel can be seen) disposed on the front side of the reel, a lamp attached to the front door 1b, etc. The invention according to the claims is realized by applying a configuration in which notification is performed by means different from the above-described embodiments, such as LED, vibration of the stop switch, ventilation from the periphery of the stop switch, and change in temperature of the stop switch. It is possible. The notification may be performed using a part of a device having other functions (for example, when notification is performed using the reel LED 55, the reel LED 55 has a function of illuminating the reel from the back side). An apparatus that performs only notification may be provided.

  (10) Moreover, in each said embodiment, the condition change means (for example, part which performs the process of S3707 of FIG. 47) which changes the conditions which provide a privilege according to a game log | history is provided. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the number of games increases to reach 5000 games, an example is given in which the probability of obtaining a privilege related to a set effect or a desired privilege set is reduced. The invention according to the claims is applied by applying a configuration in which a privilege is easily obtained as the game history is accumulated, such as increasing the probability of obtaining a privilege related to a set effect or a set desired privilege as the number increases. Can be realized.

  In each of the above embodiments, a slot machine that sets wager numbers using medals and credits has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game used in a pachinko gaming machine. Claim invention by applying the configuration shown in the above embodiment to a slot machine that uses a ball to set the number of bets or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets Can be realized. When game balls are used as game media, for example, when one medal corresponds to five game balls, and 3 is set as the bet number in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the one using only one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls, and a plurality of types of gaming machines such as medals and gaming balls, for example. The game value may be used together. That is, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls when a winning occurs. A slot machine that can pay out any of the utility value is also included in the gaming machine of the present invention.

  1 slot machine, 1a chassis, 1b front door, 2 reel unit, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 3 perspective window, 4 medal insertion part, 6 MAXBET switch, 7 start switch, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 9 medal Payout exit, 10 settlement switch, 11 credit indicator, 12 game auxiliary indicator, 13 game display, 14-16 1-3 BETLED, 17 insertion request LED, 18 start valid LED, 19 wait LED, 20 replay LED , 21 BET switch valid LED, 22L, 22C, 22R Stop valid LED, 23 Reset switch, 24 Set value display, 25 Door open detection switch, 30 Flow path switching solenoid, 31 Insertion medal sensor, 32L, 32C, 32R Reel motor 33L, 33C 33R reel sensor, 34 hopper unit, 34a hopper tank, 34b hopper motor, 34c discharge sensor, 35 overflow tank, 35a full sensor, 36a stop switch, 36b automatic settlement switch, 37 setting key switch, 38 reset / setting switch, 39 Power switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a main CPU, 41b, 91b, 755 RAM, 41c, 91c, 754 ROM, 41d, 91d I / O, 42 random number generation circuit, 43 sampling circuit, 44, 96 Switch detection circuit, 45 Motor drive circuit, 46 Solenoid drive circuit, 47, 93 LED drive circuit, 48, 98 Power interruption detection circuit, 49, 95 Reset circuit, 51 Liquid crystal display, 51a, 51b Specific effect area 52 effect LED, 53, 54, 727R, 727L speaker, 55 reel LED, 56 effect switch, 90,780 effect control board, 91 sub control unit, 91a sub CPU, 92 display control circuit, 94 audio output circuit, 97 Clock device, 100 power supply box, 101 power supply board, 110, 210 control unit, 120, 220 storage unit, 130, 230 operation unit, 140, 240 display unit, 150 wireless communication unit, 151 antenna, 160 camera unit, 250 communication unit , 700 Pachinko gaming machine, 702 Glass door frame, 703 Hitting ball supply tray, 704 Surplus ball receiving tray, 705 Hitting ball operating handle, 706 Game board, 707 Game area, 708a First special symbol display, 708b Second special symbol display, 709 effect display device, 710 normal symbol display, 711 General winning opening switch, 712 Collection passage sensor, 713 First starting winning opening, 713a First starting opening switch, 714 Second starting winning opening, 714a Second starting opening switch, 715 Variable winning ball device, 716, 721 Solenoid, 718a First special symbol hold memory display, 718b Second special symbol hold memory display, 718c First hold memory display portion, 718d Second hold memory display portion, 720 Special variable winning ball device, 723 Count switch, 725 Decoration LED , 726 Out port, 728a Top frame LED, 728b Left frame LED, 728c Right frame LED, 731 Main board, 732 Gate, 732a Gate switch, 735 Lamp driver board, 737 Dispensing control board, 741 Normal symbol hold memory display, 751 Prize ball LED, 752 Out of ball LE , 756 CPU, 757 I / O, 758 input driver circuit, 759 output circuit, 770 audio output board, 777 relay board, 797 ball payout device, 900 Internet network, 1000 external output board, 1001 gaming system, 1100 portable terminal, 1200 Management server, 7111 chance button, 7112A, 7112B selection button, 7503 random number circuit, 7560 microcomputer for game control.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A variable winning device that is changeable between a first state in which a game medium is difficult to enter or does not enter and a second state in which the game medium is easier to enter than the first state;
Predetermined effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect for notifying whether or not the variable winning device is in the second state or the possibility of being in the advantageous state;
A predetermined effect restriction means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect during a predetermined period when variable display is not performed,
The predetermined effect executing means does not execute a new predetermined effect while the predetermined effect is being executed.